Skip to main content

Full text of "The principle of relativity with applications to physical science"

See other formats


CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

C.  F.  CLAY,  MANAGER 
LONDON  :  FETTER  LANE,  E.C.  4 


LONDON  :  H.  K.  LEWIS  AND  CO.,  LTD., 

136  Gower  Street,  W.C.  i 
NEW  YORK  :  THE  MACMILLAN  CO. 

BOMBAY      ^| 

CALCUTTA  [-  MACMILLAN  AND  CO.,  LTD. 

MADRAS      J 

TORONTO   :  THE  MACMILLAN    CO.   OF 

CANADA,  LTD. 
TOKYO  :MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 


ALL   RIGHTS    RESERVED 


The 

Principle  of  Relativity 

with  applications  to 

Physical  Science 


The 

Principle  of  Relativity 

with  applications  to 
Physical  Science 


BY 
A^  N.  WHITEHEAD,  Sc.D.,  F.R.S. 

Hon.  D.Sc.  (MANCHESTER),  Hon.  LL.D.  (Sx  ANDREWS) 

Fellow  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge,  and  Professor  of 

Applied  Mathematics  in  the  Imperial  College 

of  Science  and  Technology 


M 


CAMBRIDGE 

AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 
1922 


TO  MY  WIFE 

WHOSE  ENCOURAGEMENT  AND  COUNSEL 
HAVE  MADE  MY  LIFE'S  WORK  POSSIBLE 


PRINTED  IN  GREAT  BRITAIN 


PREFACE 

THE  present  work  is  an  exposition  of  an  alternative 
rendering  of  the  theory  of  relativity.  It  takes  its 
rise  from  that  ' awakening  from  dogmatic  slumber' — to 
use  Kant's  phrase — which  we  owe  to  Einstein  and 
Minkowski.  But  it  is  not  an  attempt  to  expound  either 
Einstein's  earlier  or  his  later  theory.  The  metrical  for 
mulae  finally  arrived  at  are  those  of  the  earlier  theory, 
but  the  meanings  ascribed  to  the  algebraic  symbols  are 
entirely  different.  As  the  result  of  a  consideration  of 
the  character  of  our  knowledge  in  general,  and  of  our 
knowledge  of  nature  in  particular,  undertaken  in 
Part  I  of  this  book  and  in  my  two  previous  works*  on 
this  subject,  I  deduce  that  our  experience  requires  and 
exhibits  a  basis  of  uniformity,  and  that  in  the  case  of 
nature  this  basis  exhibits  itself  as  the  uniformity  of 
spatio-temporal  relations.  This  conclusion  entirely  cuts 
away  the  casual  heterogeneity  of  these  relations  which 
is  the  essential  of  Einstein's  later  theory.  It  is  this 
uniformity  which  is  essential  to  my  outlook,  and  not 
the  Euclidean  geometry  which  I  adopt  as  lending  itself 
to  the  simplest  exposition  of  the  facts  of  nature.  I  should 
be  very  willing  to  believe  that  each  permanent  space 
is  either  uniformly  elliptic  or  uniformly  hyperbolic,  if 
any  observations  are  more  simply  explained  by  such  a 
hypothesis. 

It  is  inherent  in  my  theory  to  maintain   the  old 
division  between  physics  and  geometry.    Physics  is  the 

*  The  Principles  of  Natural  Knowledge^  and  The  Concept  of  'Nature, 
both  Cambridge  Univ.  Press. 

a3 


vi  PREFACE 

science  of  the  contingent  relations  of  nature  and  geo 
metry  expresses  its  uniform  relatedness. 

The  book  is  divided  into  three  parts.  Part  I  is  con 
cerned  with  general  principles  and  may  roughly  be 
described  as  mainly  philosophical  in  character.  Part  II 
is  devoted  to  the  physical  applications  and  deals  with 
the  particular  results  deducible  from  the  formulae  assumed 
for  the  gravitational  and  electromagnetic  fields.  In 
relation  to  the  spectral  lines  these  formulae  would  require 
a  'limb  effect'  and  a  duplication  or  a  triplication  of  indi 
vidual  lines,  analogous  to  phenomena  already  observed. 
Part  III  is  an  exposition  of  the  elementary  theory  of 
tensors.  This  Part  has  been  added  for  one  reason  because 
it  may  be  useful  to  many  mathematicians  who  may  be 
puzzled  by  some  of  the  formulae  and  procedures  of  Part 
II.  But  this  Part  is  also  required  by  another  reason. 
The  theory  of  tensors  is  usually  expounded  under  the 
guise  of  geometrical  metaphors  which  entirely  mask  the 
type  of  application  which  I  give  to  it  in  this  work.  For 
example,  the  whole  idea  of  any  'fundamental  tensor'  is 
foreign  to  my  purpose  and  impedes  the  comprehension 
of  my  applications. 

The  order  in  which  the  parts  should  be  studied  will 
depend  upon  the  psychology  of  the  reader.  I  have  placed 
them  in  the  order  natural  to  my  own  mind,  namely, 
general  principles,  particular  applications,  and  finally 
the  general  exposition  of  the  mathematical  theory  of 
which  special  examples  have  occurred  in  the  discussion 
of  the  applications.  But  a  physicist  may  prefer  to  start 
with  Part  II,  referring  back  to  a  few  formulae  which 
have  been  mentioned  at  the  end  of  Part  I,  and  a 
mathematician  may  start  with  Part  III.  The  whole 
evidence  requires  a  consideration  of  the  three  Parts. 


PREFACE  vii 

Practically  the  whole  of  the  book  has  been  delivered 
in  the  form  of  lectures  either  in  America  at  the  College 
of  Bryn  Mawr,  or  before  the  Royal  Society  of  Edinburgh, 
or  to  my  pupils  in  the  Imperial  College.  I  have  care 
fully  preserved  the  lecture  form  and  also  some  redupli 
cation  of  statement,  particularly  in  Part  I. 

The  exposition  of  a  novel  idea  which  has  many  reactions 
upon  diverse  current  modes  of  thought  is  a  difficult 
business.  The  most  successful  example  in  the  history 
of  science  is,  I  think,  Galileo's  'Dialogues  on  the  Two 
Systems  of  the  World.'  An  examination  of  that  masterly 
work  will  show  that  the  dialogue  form  is  an  essential 
element  to  its  excellence.  It  allows  the  main  expositor 
of  the  dialogues  continually  to  restate  his  ideas  in 
reference  to  diverse  trains  of  thought  suggested  by  the 
other  interlocutors.  Now  the  process  of  understanding 
new  conceptions  is  essentially  the  process  of  laying  the 
new  ideas  alongside  of  our  pre-existing  trains  of  thought. 
Accordingly  for  an  author  of  adequate  literary  ability 
the  dialogue  is  the  natural  literary  form  for  the  pro 
longed  explanation  of  a  tangled  subject.  The  custom 
of  modern  presentations  of  science,  and  my  own  diffi 
dence  of  success  in  the  art  of  managing  a  dialogue, 
have  led  me  to  adopt  the  modified  form  of  lectures  in 
which  the  audiences —  real  audiences,  either  in  America, 
Edinburgh  or  South  Kensington — are  to  be  regarded 
as  silent  interlocutors  demanding  explanations  of  the 
various  aspects  of  the  theory. 

Chapter  II  was  originally  delivered*  in  Edinburgh 

as  a  lecture  to  the  Royal  Society  of  Edinburgh  when 

it  did  me  the  honour  of  making  me  the  first  recipient  of 

the  'James-Scott  Prize'  for  the  encouragement  of  the 

*  June  5,  1922. 


viii  PREFACE 

philosophy  of  science.  Chapter  IV  was  originally 
delivered*  at  the  College  of  Bryn  Mawr,  near  Phila 
delphia,  on  the  occasion  of  a  festival  promoted  by 
the  former  pupils  and  colleagues  of  Prof.  Charlotte 
Angus  Scott  in  honour  of  her  work  as  Professor  of 
Mathematics  at  the  college  since  its  foundation. 

My  thanks  are  due  to  my  colleague,  Assistant-Pro 
fessor  Sillick,  for  the  figure  on  p.  31.  I  am  also  further 
indebted  to  him  for  a  series  of  beautiful  slides  containing 
the  mathematical  formulae  of  Chapter  IV;  even  the 
admirable  printing  of  the  Cambridge  University  Press 
will  not  compensate  readers  of  this  book  for  the  loss  of 
the  slides  as  used  in  the  original  lecture. 

In  acknowledging  my  obligations  to  the  efficiency 
and  courtesy  of  the  staff  of  the  University  Press,  I  take 
the  opportunity  of  paying  a  respectful  tribute  to  the 
work  of  the  late  Mr  A.  H.  Waller  as  secretary  of  the 
Press  Syndicate.  The  initial  negotiations  respecting 
this  book  were  conducted  through  him  and  he  died  just 
as  the  printing  commenced.  The  loss  of  his  wisdom,  his 
knowledge,  and  his  charm  will  leave  a  gap  in  the  hearts 
of  all  those  who  have  to  deal  with  the  great  Institution 
which  he  served  so  well. 

*  April  18,  1922. 

A.  N.  W. 

15  September,  1922. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 
PART  I.    GENERAL  PRINCIPLES 

PAGES 

CHAPTER  I.   PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  3-12 

Scope  of  doctrine  of  relativity :  the  two  gauges :  philosophy  : 
Poyn ting's  aphorism  :  time  and  space  :  physical  objects :  the  planet 
Mercury:  spectral  lines,  shift,  limb  effect  and  duplication:  two  novel 
magnetic  forces  in  steady  fields :  temperature  effect. 

II.  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  .         .         .         13-39 

1  James-Scott  Prize ' :  Hume  and  relatedness :  a  ground  of  uni 
formity  :  fact  and  factors  :  awareness,  cogitation  and  entities :  fact 
not  an  entity :  concreteness,  embeddedness,  factuality :  limitation, 
fmitude,  canalisation :  examples :  the  significance  of  factors :  active 
and  passive  cognisance,  cognisance  by  adjective  and  cognisance  by 
relatedness :  full  awareness :  spatio-temporal  relationships  :  sense- 
awareness  and  nature :  nature  significant  of  ideality  :  nature,  time 
and  space,  events  :  nature  as  a  closed  system  :  objection  to  doctrine 
of  relatedness,  truth  incompatible  with  any  i^imrancc:  essential  and 
contingent  relationships  :  significance  concerned  with  essential  rela 
tionships  :  every  factor  uniformly  significant :  patience  of  fact  for 
each  factor :  examples :  uniform  significance  of  events,  spatio-temporal 
structure:  dissent  from  Einstein:  stratification,  patience  of  fact  for 
finite  consciousness:  objects  and  recognition:  a  field:  two-termed 
relation  between  universals  and  concrete  particulars :  observer's  mind : 
solipsism :  adjectives  of  events :  contraction  of  sphere  of  contingency : 
structure  of  the  continuum  of  events :  past,  present,  future,  causal  past, 
causal  future,  co-present  region :  spatial  routes,  historical  routes :  per 
vasive  adjectives  and  adjectival  particles:  individuality  and  process: 
pseudo-adjectives  and  sense-objects  :  atomic  field  of  an  adjectival 
particle :  scientific  objects  qualify  future  events :  permanence  and  field : 
critical  velocity  c :  velocity  of  light :  tubes  of  force :  obstructed  fields : 
ether  and  the  apparent  world  identical:  ether  of  events:  events  sup 
plant  stuff:  Descartes  on  space  and  time :  necessity  of  definite  meaning 
for  symbols. 

III.  EQUALITY 40-60 

Importance  of  equality:  equality,  congruence,  quantity,  measure 
ment,  identity,  diversity:  Euclid's  axiom:  «ros:  characteristics  of  the 
equality   relation:    matching:    congruence    of   stretches:    axiom   of 
Archimedes:    Sophus  Lie:    multiplicity  of  inconsistent  congruence 
relations :  gap  in  classical  theory :  necessity  of  structure :  straight 
lines,  planes,  order,  parallelism,  rectangularity :  space,  bodies,  events : 
origin  of  parallelism:    origin  of  perpendicularity:    impossibility  of 
deriving  time  from  permanent  bodies :  Einstein  and  alternative  time- 
systems  :  order  in  space  derivative  from  order  in  time. 


x  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

<*' 

PAGES 

IV.  SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE  41-88 
The  apparent  world :  bifurcation  of  nature:  two-fold  cognisance, 
cognisance  by  adjective,  cognisance  by  relatedness :  systematic 
coherency  of  nature :  events  and  two-fold  cognisance :  perception :  the 
contingency  of  appearance :  the  uniform  significance  of  events :  the 
yard-measure:  doctrine  of  time:  time  a  stratification  of  nature:  no 
unique  system  of  temporal  stratification :  Einstoin :  simultaneity 
fundamental :  appearance  is  nature :  time  and  space,  their  assimila 
tion  and  distinction :  spatial  and  historical  routes :  individuality  of 
adjectival  particles  derivative  from  their  historical  routes:  time- 
systems  and  parallelism:  Euclidean  assumption,  slight  evidence: 
permanent  space  of  a  time-system  derivative  from  rest  and  motion : 
permanent  points :  spatial  and  temporal  relations  of  permanent  bodies 
arise  mediately :  the  physical  field :  limitation  of  the  contingency  of 
appearance:  intermediate  distribution  of  character  attachable  to 
future  events :  physical  field  not  cause  of  perception :  physical  field 
atomic:  physical  atomic  character  exemplifies  Aristotelian  attribute: 
knowledge  impossible  without  atomicity:  systematic  relatedness, 
intelligibility  due  to  uniformity  and  to  atomicity  of  the  contingent: 
sense  in  which  physical  field  is  perceived:  adjectival  particles:  their 
definition:  pervasion:  they  involve  stretches  of  route:  kinematic 
elements:  mass-particles:  kinematic  past,  kinematic  future,  region 
co-present,  causal  past,  causal  future:  Faraday's  tubes  of  force: 
metrical  formulae :  impetus :  potential  mass  impetus,  potential  electro 
magnetic  impetus:  realised  impetus:  stationary  property  of  realised 
impetus:  gravitational  field:  an  integral  law  of  gravitation:  com 
parison  with  Einstein's  law:  conditions  fulfilled:  four  alternative 
laws  satisfying  all  conditions  at  present  known :  rotation :  the  genius 
of  Einstein  and  Minkowski. 


PART  II.    PHYSICAL  APPLICATIONS 

V.  THE  EQUATIONS  OF  MOTION  ....        91-92 
Derivative  forms  of  the  equations:  the  pure  centrifugal  gravitational 

terms :    the   composite   centrifugal   gravitational   terms :    the   pure 
gravitational  term. 

VI.  ON  THE  FORMULA  FOR  dJ*    ....       93-100 
Fundamental  formulae :  the  general  potential :  the  tensor  potential : 

the  first  associate  potential:    the   second  associate  potential:    the 
contemporary  positions :  the  associated  space. 

VII.  PERMANENT  GRAVITATIONAL  FIELDS  101 

VIII.  APPARENT  MASS  AND  THE  SPECTRAL 
SHIFT      .                          .                 ...  102-103 

IX.  PLANETARY  MOTION          .  104-105 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS  xi 

PAGES 

X.  ELECTROMAGNETIC  EQUATIONS     .         .     106-107 

XI.  GRAVITATION  AND  LIGHT  WAVES         .     108-111 

XII.  TEMPERATURE  EFFECTS  ON  GRAVITA 
TIONAL  FORCES   112-113 

XIII.  THE  ELECTROSTATIC  POTENTIAL  AND 
SPECTRAL  SHIFT 114-116 

XIV.  THE  LIMB  EFFECT 117-120 

XV.  PERMANENT   DIRECTIONS   OF   VIBRA 
TION  AND  THE  DOUBLING  EFFECT         .     121-126 

XVI.  STEADY  ELECTROMAGNETIC  FIELDS     .     127-131 

XVII.  THE  MOON'S  MOTION          ...         .         .     132-136 

PART  III.    ELEMENTARY  THEORY  OF  TENSORS 

XVIII.  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS        .         .         .     139-147 
SECTION  1.    Coordinates:     2.    Scalar  Characters  and  Invariant  Ex 
pressions:     3.    Physical  Characters  of  the  First  Order:    4.    Tensors 
of  the  First  Order:     5.    Covariant  and  Contra  variant  First-Order 
Tensors :     6.   Characters  and  Tensors  of  Higher  Orders :     7.   Tensor- 
Invariance  of  Formulae. 

XIX.  ELEMENTARY  PROPERTIES        .         .         .     148-152 
SECTIONS.  Test  for  Tensor  Property :   9.  Sum  of  Tensors :   10.  Pro 
duct  of  Tensors :     11.    Representation  of  a  Tensor  as  a  Sum  of 
Products. 

XX.  THE  PROCESS  OF  RESTRICTION  .         .        .     153-159 
SECTION  12.   Definition  of  Restriction :    13.   Multiple  Restriction : 

14.  Invariant  Products:  15.  The  Tensor  ||/||:  16.  Restriction  of 
a  Single  Mixed  Tensor:  17.  Argument  from  Products  [Restricted 
or  Unrestricted]  to  the  Tensor  Property:  18.  Differential  Forms. 

XXL    TENSORS  OF  THE  SECOND  ORDER    .        .     160-165 
SECTION  19.    Symmetric  Tensors :     20.    Skew  Tensors:     21.    The 
Determinants:     22.    Associate  Tensors:     23.    Derivative  Tensors. 

XXII.   THE  GALILEAN  TENSOR    ....     166-172 

SECTION  24.    Galilean  Tensors  :     25.    Galilean  Differential  Forms  : 

26.   The  Linear  Equations  of  Transformation :    27.   Cartesian  Group : 

28.  Associate  Galilean  Tensors  and  Galilean  Derivative  Tensors  : 

29.  Galilean  Derivative  Tensors  of  the  First  Order. 


xii  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

PAGES 

XXIII.  THE   DIFFERENTIATION   OF   TENSOR 
COMPONENTS 173-183 

SECTION  30.  The Christoffel  Three-Index  Symbols:  31.  Differentia 
tion  of  Determinants  of  Tensors :  32.  The  Standard  Formulae : 
33.  Covariant  Tensors  of  the  First  Order :  34.  Contravariant  Tensors 
of  the  First  Order:  35.  An  Example:  36.  Tensors  of  the  Second 
Order:  37.  Tensors  of  the  Third  Order. 

XXIV.  SOME  IMPORTANT  TENSORS    .         .         .     184-190 
SECTION  38.    The  Riemann-Christoffel  Tensor:     39.    The  Linear 

Gravitational  Tensor :     40.    Cyclic  Reduction :     41.   Some  Cartesian 
Group-Tensors. 


PART  I 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES 


W.  R. 


CHAPTER  I 

PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS 

THE  doctrine  of  relativity  affects  every  branch  of  natural 
science,  not  excluding  the  biological  sciences.  In  general, 
however,  this  impact  of  the  new  doctrine  on  the  older 
sciences  lies  in  the  future  and  will  disclose  itself  in  ways 
not  yet  apparent.  Relativity,  in  the  form  of  novel 
formulae  relating  time  and  space,  first  developed  in  con 
nection  with  electromagnetism,  including  light  pheno 
mena.  Einstein  then  proceeded  to  show  its  bearing  on 
the  formulae  for  gravitation.  It  so  happens  therefore 
that  owing  to  the  circumstances  of  its  origin  a  very 
general  doctrine  is  linked  with  two  special  applications. 

In  this  procedure  science  is  evolving  according  to  its 
usual  mode.  In  that  atmosphere  of  thought  doctrines 
are  valued  for  their  utility  as  instruments  of  research. 
Only  one  question  is  asked :  Has  the  doctrine  a  precise 
application  to  a  variety  of  particular  circumstances  so 
as  to  determine  the  exact  phenomena  which  should  be 
then  observed?  In  the  comparative  absence  of  these 
applications  beauty,  generality,  or  even  truth,  will  not 
save  a  doctrine  from  neglect  in  scientific  thought.  With 
them,  it  will  be  absorbed. 

Accordingly  a  new  scientific  outlook  clings  to  those 
fields  where  its  first  applications  are  to  be  found.  They 
are  its  title  deeds  for  consideration.  But  in  testing  its 
truth,  if  the  theory  have  the  width  and  depth  which 
marks  a  fundamental  reorganisation,  we  cannot  wisely 
confine  ourselves  solely  to  the  consideration  of  a  few 
happy  applications.  The  history  of  science  is  strewn 
with  the  happy  applications  of  discarded  theories.  There 

1—2 


4  PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  [OH 

are  two  gauges  through  which  every  theory  must  pass. 
There  is  the  broad  gauge  which  tests  its  consonance  with 
the  general  character  of  our  direct  experience,  and  there 
is  the  narrow  gauge  which  is  that  mentioned  above  as 
being  the  habitual  working  gauge  of  science.  These 
reflections  have  been  suggested  by  the  advice  received 
from  two  distinguished  persons  to  whom  at  different 
times  I  had  explained  the  scheme  of  this  book.  The 
philosopher  advised  me  to  omit  the  mathematics,  and 
the  mathematician  urged  the  cutting  out  of  the  philo 
sophy.  At  the  moment  I  was  persuaded:  it  certainly 
is  a  nuisance  for  philosophers  to  be  worried  with  applied 
mathematics,  and  for  mathematicians  to  be  saddled  with 
philosophy.  But  further  reflection  has  made  me  retain 
my  original  plan.  The  difficulty  is  inherent  in  the 
subject  matter. 

To  expect  to  reorganise  our  ideas  of  Time,  Space,  and 
Measurement  without  some  discussion  which  must  be 
ranked  as  philosophical  is  to  neglect  the  teaching  of 
history  and  the  inherent  probabilities  of  the  subject. 
On  the  other  hand  no  reorganisation  of  these  ideas  can 
command  confidence  unless  it  supplies  science  with  added 
power  in  the  analysis  of  phenomena.  The  evidence  is 
twro-fold,  and  is  fatally  weakened  if  the  two  parts  are 
disjoined. 

At  the  same  time  it  is  well  to  understand  the  limita-^1 
tions  to  the  meaning  of  'philosophy'  in  this  connection. 
It  has  nothing  to  do  with  ethics  or  theology  or  the 
theory  of  aesthetics.  It  is  solely  engaged  in  determining 
the  most  general  conceptions  which  apply  to  things 
observed  by  the  senses.  Accordingly  it  is  not  even 
metaphysics  :  it  should  be  called  pan-physics.  Its  task 
is  to  formulate  those  principles  of  science  which  are 


i]  PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  5 

employed  equally  in  every  branch  of  natural  science.  | 
Sir  J.  J.  Thomson,  reviewing  in  Nature*  Poynting's 
Collected  Papers,  has  quoted  a  statement  taken  from 
rone  of  Poynting's  addresses : 

'  I  have  no  doubt  whatever  that  our  ultimate  aim 
must  be  to  describe  the  sensible  in  terms  of  the  sensible.' 

Adherence  to  this  aphorism,  sanctioned  by  the 
authority  of  two  great  English  physicists,  is  the  keynote 
of  everything  in  the  following  chapters.  The  philosophy  J 
of  science  is  the  endeavour  to  formulate  the  most  general  I 
characters  of  things  observed.  These  sought-for  charac 
ters  are  to  be  no  fancy  characters  of  a  fairy  tale  enacted 
behind  the  scenes.  They  must  be  observed  characters! 
of  things  observed.  Nature  is  what  is  observed,  and  the 
ether  is  an  observed  character  of  things  observed.  Thus 
the  philosophy  of  science  only  differs  from  any  of  the 
special  natural  sciences  by  the  fact  that  it  is  natural 
science  at  the  stage  before  it  is  convenient  to  split  it  up 
into  its  various  branches.  This  philosophy  exists  because 
there  is  something  to  be  said  before  we  commence  the 
process  of  differentiation.  It  is  true  that  in  human 
thought  the  particular  precedes  the  general.  Accord 
ingly  the  philosophy  will  not  advance  until  the  branches 
of  science  have  made  independent  progress.  Philosophy 
then  appears  as  a  criticism  and  a  corrective,  and — what 
is  now  to  the  purpose — as  an  additional  source  of  evi 
dence  in  times  of  fundamental  reorganisation. 

This  assignment  of  the  role  of  philosophy  is  borne 
out  by  history.  It  is  not  true  that  science  has  advanced 
in  disregard  of  any  general  discussion  of  the  character 
of  the  universe.  The  scientists  of  the  Renaissance  and 
their  immediate  successors  of  the  seventeenth  century, 
*  Dec.  30,  1920. 


PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS 


[CH 


to  whom  we  owe  our  traditional  concepts,  inherited 
from  Plato,  Aristotle  and  the  medieval  scholastics.  It 
is  true  that  the  New  Learning  reacted  violently  against 
the  schoolmen  who  were  their  immediate  predecessors; 
but,  like  the  Israelites  when  they  fled  from  Egypt,  they 
borrowed  their  valuables — and  in  this  case  the  valuables 
were  certain  root-presuppositions  respecting  space,  time, 
matter,  predicate  and  subject,  and  logic  in  general.  It 
is  legitimate  (as  a  practical  counsel  in  the  management 
of  a  short  life)  to  abstain  from  the  criticism  of  scientific 
foundations  so  long  as  the  superstructure  '  works. '  But 
to  neglect  philosophy  when  engaged  in  the  re-formation 
of  ideas  is  to  assume  the  absolute  correctness  of  the 
chance  philosophic  prejudices  imbibed  from  a  nurse  or 
a  schoolmaster  or  current  modes  of  expression.  It  is  to 
enact  the  part  of  those  who  thank  Providence  that  they 
have  been  saved  from  the  perplexities  of  religious  en 
quiry  by  the  happiness  of  birth  in  the  true  faith.  The 
truth  is  that  your  available  concepts  depend  upon  your 
philosophy.  An  examination  of  the  writings  of  John 
Stuart  Mill  and  his  immediate  successors  on  the  pro 
cedure  of  science — writings  of  the  highest  excellence 
within  their  limitations — will  show  that  they  are  ex 
clusively  considering  the  procedure  of  science  in  the 
framing  of  laws  with  the  employment  of  given  concepts. 
If  this  limitation  be  admitted,  the  conclusion  at  once 
follows  that  philosophy  is  useless  in  the  progress  of 
science.  But  when  once  you  tamper  with  your  basic 
concepts,  philosophy  is  merely  the  marshalling  of  one 
main  source  of  evidence,  and  cannot  be  neglected. 

But  when  all  has  been  said  respecting  the  importance 
,  of  philosophy  for  the  discovery  of  scientific  truth,  the 
I  narrow-gauged  pragmatic  test  will  remain  the  final 


i]  PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  7 

arbiter.  Accordingly  I  now  proceed  to  a  summary 
account  of  the  general  doctrine  either  implicit  or  explicit 
in  the  following  pages  or  in  my  two  previous  books  * 
on  this  subject,  and  to  detail  the  facts  of  experience 
which  receive  their  explanation  from  it  or  should  be 
observed  if  it  be  true. 

A  relativistic  view  of  time  is  adopted  so  that  an  in 
stantaneous  moment  of  time  is  nothing  else  than  an 
instantaneous  and  simultaneous  spread  of  the  events  of 
the  universe.  But  in  the  concept  of  instantaneousness 
the  concept  of  the  passage  of  time  has  been  lost.  Events 
essentially  involve  this  passage.  Accordingly  the  self- 
contradictory  idea  of  an  instantaneous  event  has  to  be 
replaced  by  that  of  an  instantaneous  configuration  of 
the  universe.  But  what  is  directly  observed  is  an  event. 
Thus  a  duration,  which  is  a  slab  of  time  with  temporal 
thickness,  is  the  final  fact  of  observation  from  which 
moments  and  configurations  are  deduced  as  a  limit  which 
is  a  logical  ideal  of  the  exact  precision  inherent  in 
nature.  This  process  of  deducing  limits  is  considered 
in  detail  in  my  two  previous  books  under  the  title 
Extensive  Abstraction.  But  it  is  an  essential  assump 
tion  that  a  concrete  fact  of  nature  always  includes 
temporal  passage. 

A  moment  expresses  the  spread  of  nature  as  a  con 
figuration  in  an  instantaneous  three  dimensional  space. 
The  flow  of  time  means  the  succession  of  moments,  and 
this  succession  includes  the  whole  of  nature.  Rest  and 
motion  are  direct  facts  of  observation  concerning  the 
relation  of  objects  to  the  durations  whose  limits  are  the 
moments  of  this  flow  of  time.  By  means  of  rest  a 

*  The  Principles  of  Natural  Knowledge,  and  The  Concept  of 
Nature,  both  Camb.  Univ.  Press. 


8  PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  [en 

permanent  point  is  defined  which  is  merely  a  track  of 
event-particles  with  one  event-particle  in  every  moment. 

Refined  observation  (in  the  form  of  the  Michelson- 
Morley  experiment  and  allied  experiments)  shows  that 
there  are  alternative  flows  of  time — or  time-systems, 
as  they  will  be  called, — and  that  the  time-system 
actually  observed  is  that  one  for  which  (roughly 
speaking)  our  body  is  at  rest.  Accordingly  in  different 
circumstances  of  motion,  space  and  time  mean  different 
things,  the  moments  of  one  time-system  are  different 
from  the  moments  of  another  time-system,  the  per 
manent  points  of  one  time-system  are  different  from 
those  of  another  time-system,  so  that  the  permanent 
space  of  one  time-system  is  distinct  from  the  permanent 
space  of  another  time-system. 

The  properties  of  time  and  space  express  the  basis  of 
uniformity  in  nature  which  is  essential  for  our  know 
ledge  of  nature  as  a  coherent  system.  The  physical  field 
expresses  the  unessential  uniformities  regulating  the 
contingency  of  appearance.  In  a  fuller  consideration  of 
experience  they  may  exhibit  themselves  as  essential; 
but  if  we  limit  ourselves  to  nature  there  is  no  essential 
reason  for  the  particular  nexus  of  appearance. 

Thus  times  and  spaces  are  uniform. 

Position  in  space  is  merely  the  expression  of  diversity 
of  relations  to  alternative  time -systems.  Order  in  space 
is  merely  the  reflection  into  the  space  of  one  time-system 
of  the  time-orders  of  alternative  time-systems. 

A  plane  in  space  expresses  the  quality  of  the  locus  of 
intersection  of  a  moment  of  the  time-system  in  question 
(call  it  'time-system  A ')  with  a  moment  of  another  time- 
system  (time-system  B). 

The  parallelism  of  planes  in  the  space  of  time-system 
A  means  that  these  planes  result  from  the  intersections 


i]  PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  9 

of  moments  of  A  with  moments  of  one  other  time- 
system  B. 

A  straight  line  in  the  space  of  time-system  A  perpen 
dicular  to  the  planes  due  to  time-system  B  is  the  track 
in  the  space  of  time-system  A  of  a  body  at  rest  in  the 
space  of  time-system  B. 

Thus  the  uniform  Euclidean  geometry  of  spaces, 
planeness,  parallelism,  and  perpendicularity  are  merely 
expressive  of  the  relations  to  each  other  of  alternative 
time-systems. 

The  tracks  which  are  the  permanent  points  of  the 
same  time -system  are  also  reckoned  as  parallels. 

Congruence — and  thence,  spatial  measurement — is 
defined  in  terms  of  the  properties  of  parallelograms  and 
the  symmetry  of  perpendicularity. 

Accordingly,  position,  planes,  straight  lines,  paral 
lelism,  perpendicularity,  and  congruence  are  expressive 
of  the  mutual  relations  of  alternative  time-systems. 

The  symmetrical  properties  of  relative  velocity  are 
shown  (in  The  Principles  of  Natural  Knowledge]  to 
issue  in  a  critical  velocity  c,  which  thus  is  defined  with 
out  reference  to  the  velocity  of  light.  However  experi 
ment  shows  that  for  our  purposes  it  must  be  a  near 
approach  to  that  velocity.  The  final  result  is  the  geo 
metry  and  kinematic  which  are  explained  in  Chapter  iv 
of  the  present  volume. 

A  physical  object,  such  as  a  mass-particle  or  an  elec 
tron,  expresses  the  character  of  the  future  so  far  as  it 
is  determined  by  the  happenings  of  the  present.  The 
exact  meaning  of  an  object  as  an  entity  implicated  in 
events  is  explained.  The  track  of  an  object  amid  events 
is  determined  by  the  '  stationary '  property  of  the  impetus 
realised  by  the  pervasion  of  the  track  by  the  object. 
This  impetus  depends  partly  on  the  intrinsic  character 


10  PBEFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  [OH 

of  the  object  —  e.g.  its  mass  or  its  electric  charge  —  and 
partly  on  the  intrinsic  potential  impetus  of  the  track 
itself.  This  potential  impetus  arises  from  the  physical 
character  of  the  events  of  the  region  due  to  the  presence 
of  other  objects  in  the  past.  This  physical  character  is 
partly  gravitational  and  partly  electrical. 

This  dependence  of  physical  character  on  antecedent 
objects  is  directly  expressed  by  the  formula  here  adopted 
for  the  gravitational  law.  This  law  also  gives  the  most 
direct  expression  to  the  principle  that  the  flux  of  time 
is  essential  to  the  concrete  reality  of  nature,  so  that  a 
loss  of  time-flux  means  a  transference  to  a  higher  ab 
straction.  It  gives  this  expression  by  conceiving  the 
attracting  body  as  pervading  an  element  of  its  track 
and  not  as  at  an  event-particle.  This  law  gives  the 
Einstein  expression  for  the  revolution  of  the  perihelion 
of  Mercury. 

The  electromagnetic  equations  adopted  are  Maxwell's 
equations  modified  by  the  gravitational  tensor  compo 
nents  in  the  well-known  way.  Light  is  given  no  privi 
leged  position,  and  all  deductions  concerning  light  follow 
directly  from  treating  it  as  consisting  of  short  waves  of 
electromagnetic  disturbance.  In  this  way  Einstein's 
assumption  that  a  ray  of  light  follows  the  path 


[i.e.  in  Einstein's  notation 

ds2  =  0] 

can  be  proved  as  an  approximation  due  to  the  shortness 
of  the  waves. 

The  bending  of  the  light  rays  in  a  gravitational  field 
then  follows. 

With  regard  to  the  shift  of  spectral  lines,  there  are 


i]  PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  11 

three  effects  to  be  considered:  (i)  Einstein's  predicted 
shift  due  to  the  gravitational  potential,  (ii)  the  limb 
effect  which  has  been  observed  in  the  case  of  light  from 
the  sun,  (iii)  the  doubling  or  trebling  of  spectral  lines 
observed  in  the  spectra  due  to  some  nebulae.  Neither 
of  the  effects  (ii)  or  (iii)  has  hitherto  been  explained. 

As  to  (i)  this  is  traced  to  the  combination  of  two 
causes,  one  being  the  change  in  the  apparent  mass  due 
to  the  gravitational  potential  and  the  other  being  the 
change  in  the  electric  cohesive  forces  of  the  molecule 
due  to  the  gravitational  field.  The  total  result  is  that  the 
period  of  vibration  is  changed  from  T  to  T+ST7,  where 


T     6c2' 

i//4  being  the  gravitational  potential.  Einstein's  result 
is  t/>4/c%  so  that  the  two  formulae  are  practically  identical 
for  observational  purposes. 

With  regard  to  effects  (ii)  and  (iii)  reasons  are  given 
for  believing  that  the  molecules  will  separate  into  three 
groups  sending  a  distant  observer  light  of  changing 
relative  intensities  as  we  pass  from  the  centre  of  the 
disc  of  the  emitting  body  (sun  or  nebulae)  to  the  edge. 
One  group  has  the  above-mentioned  shift,  another  has 
the  shift 


~ 

(where  77  is  probably  about  1/10,  but  may  be  nearly  1/5), 
and  the  third  group  has  the  shift 

8T_2+2 

T  *'"WVi- 

Under  circumstances  such  that  all  or  two  of  the  groups 
send  separately  observable  light,  the  trebling  or  doubling 
effects  are  explained  to  the  extent  of  demonstrating  the 


12  PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS  [OH  i 

existence  of  causes  for  the  multiplication  of  lines,  other 
than  those  due  to  the  motions  of  the  matter  of  the  nebulae. 
Under  other  circumstances  (e.g.  light  from  the  sun's  disc) 
in  which  the  influence  of  the  grouping  is  effective  but 
not  separately  observable  the  shift  approximates  to 
^  T  1 


j  +      l  - 

where  ySx  varies  from  zero  at  the  centre  of  the  disc  of 
the  sun  to  ?r/2  at  its  edge.  But  there  will  be  various 
intermediate  circumstances  between  these  extreme  as 
sumptions  as  to  the  observability  of  the  grouping  effect. 

Finally  in  a  steady  electromagnetic  field  the  electro 
magnetic  equations  predict  two  novel  magnetic  forces 
due  to  the  gravitational  field.  These  forces  are  exces 
sively  small:  (i)  A  steady  electric  force  at  a  point  on 
the  earth's  surface  (F  in  electrostatic  units)  should  be 
accompanied  by  the  horizontal  magnetic  force 

r2xlO~9x.Fsma  (gausses) 

perpendicular  to  its  direction  and  to  the  vertical,  where 
a  is  the  angle  between  these  directions. 

(ii)  A  steady  current  (/  in  electromagnetic  measure) 
in  a  straight  wire  making  an  angle  /3  with  the  vertical 
should  produce  at  a  point  distant  R  from  the  wire  the 
parallel  magnetic  force  (i.e.  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the 
wire), 

1  27 

-  x  10~9x  cos  <£  sin  2/3  x  -^  (gausses), 

where  <£  is  the  angle  between  the  vertical  plane  through 
the  wire  and  the  plane  through  the  wire  and  the  point. 
The  temperature  of  an  attracting  body  should  augment 
its  gravitational  field  by  an  amount  which  is  probably 
outside  the  limits  of  our  observational  powers. 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE 

"Threads  and  floating  wisps 
Of  being,  ..." 

CLEMENCE  DANE'S  Will  Shakespeare,  Act  i. 

You  have  conferred  upon  me  the  honour  of  becoming 
the  first  recipient  of  the  'James-Scott  Prize,'  and  have 
at  the  same  time  assigned  to  me  the  duty  of  delivering 
a  lecture  upon  the  subject  which  this  prize  is  designed 
to  foster.  In  choosing  the  topic  of  a  lecture  which  is  to 
be  the  first  of  a  series  upon  the  philosophy  of  science, 
it  seems  suitable  to  explore  the  broadest  possible  aspect 
of  the  subject.  Accordingly  I  propose  to  address  you 
upon  Relatedness  and,  in  particular,  upon  the  Related- 
ness  of  Nature.  I  feel  some  natural  diffidence  in  speaking 
upon  this  theme  in  the  capital  of  British  metaphysics, 
haunted  by  the  shade  of  Hume.  This  great  thinker 
made  short  work  of  the  theory  of  the  relatedness  of 
nature  as  it  existed  in  the  current  philosophy  of  his 
time.  It  is  hardly  too  much  to  say  that  the  course  of 
subsequent  philosophy,  including  even  Hume's  own 
later  writings  and  the  British  Empirical  School,  but 
still  more  in  the  stream  which  descends  through  Kant, 
Hegel  and  Caird,  has  been  an  endeavour  to  restore 
some  theory  of  relatedness  to  replace  the  one  demolished 
by  Hume's  youthful  scepticism.  If  you  once  conceive 
fundamental  fact  as  a  multiplicity  of  subjects  qualified 
by  predicates,  you  must  fail  to  give  a  coherent  account 
of  experience.  The  disjunction  of  subjects  is  the  pre 
supposition  from  which  you  start,  and  you  can  only 


14  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [OH 

account  for  conjunctive  relations  by  some  fallacious 
sleight  of  hand,  such  as  Leibniz's  metaphor  of  his  monads 
engaged  in  mirroring.  The  alternative  philosophic  posi 
tion  must  commence  with  denouncing  the  whole  idea 
of  '  subject  qualified  by  predicate '  as  a  trap  set  for 
philosophers  by  the  syntax  of  language.  The  conclusion 
which  I  shall  wish  to  enforce  is  that  we  can  discern  in 
nature  a  ground  of  uniformity,  of  which  the  more  far- 
reaching  example  is  the  uniformity  of  space-time  and 
the  more  limited  example  is  what  is  usually  known 
under  the  title,  The  Uniformity  of  Nature.  My  argu 
ments  must  be  based  upon  considerations  of  the  utmost 
generality  untouched  by  the  peculiar  features  of  any 
particular  natural  science.  It  is  therefore  inevitable  that 
at  the  beginning  my  exposition  will  suffer  from  the 
vagueness  which  clings  to  generality. 

Fact  is  a  relationship  of  factors.  Every  factor  of  fact 
essentially  refers  to  its  relationships  within  fact.  Apart 
from  this  reference  it  is  not  itself.  Thus  every  factor  of 
fact  has  fact  for  its  background,  and  refers  to  fact  in  a 
way  peculiar  to  itself. 

I  shall  use  the  term  '  awareness '  for  consciousness  of 
factors  within  fact.  A  converse  mode  of  statement  is 
that  awareness  is  consciousness  of  fact  as  involving 
factors.  Awareness  is  itself  a  factor  within  fact. 

I  shall  use  the  term  ' cogitation'  for  consciousness  of 
factors  prescinded  from  their  background  of  fact.  It  is 
the  consciousness  of  the  individuality  of  factors,  in  that 
each  factor  is  itself  and  not  another.  A  factor  cogitated 
upon  as  individual  will  be  called  an  'entity.'  The 
essence  of  cogitation  is  consciousness  of  diversity.  The 
prescinding  from  the  background  of  fact  consists  in 
limiting  consciousness  to  awareness  of  the  contrast  of 


ii]  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  15 

factors.  Cogitation  thus  presupposes  awareness  and  is 
limited  by  the  limitations  of  awareness.  It  is  the  re 
finement  of  awareness,  and  the  unity  of  consciousness 
lies  in  this  dependence  of  cogitation  upon  awareness. 
Thus  awareness  is  crude  consciousness  and  cogitation 
is  refined  consciousness.  For  awareness  all  relations 
between  factors  are  internal  and  for  cogitation  all 
relations  between  entities  are  external. 

Fact  in  its  totality  is  not  an  entity  for  cogitation, 
since  it  has  no  individuality  by  its  reference  to  any 
thing  other  than  itself.  It  is  not  a  relatum  in  the 
relationship  of  contrast.  I  might  have  used  the  term 
'  totality '  instead  of  '  fact ' ;  but  c  fact '  is  shorter  and 
gives  rise  to  the  convenient  term  *  factor.'  Fact  enters 
consciousness  in  away  peculiar  to  itself.  It  is  not  the  sum 
of  factors ;  it  is  rather  the  concreteness  (or,  embedded- 
ness)  of  factors,  and  the  concreteness  of  an  inexhaustible 
relatedness  among  inexhaustible  relata.  If  for  one 
moment  I  may  use  the  inadmissible  word  'Factuality,'  it 
is  in  some  ways  better  either  than  'fact'  or  'totality'  for 
the  expression  of  my  meaning.  For  'fact'  suggests  one 
fact  among  others.  This  is  not  what  I  mean,  and  is  a  sub 
ordinate  meaning  which  I  express  by  'factor.'  Also 
'totality'  suggests  a  definite  aggregate  which  is  all  that 
there  is,  and  which  can  be  constructed  as  the  sum  of  all 
subordinate  aggregates.  I  deny  this  view  of  factuality. 
For  example,  in  the  very  conception  of  the  addition  of 
subordinate  aggregates,  the  concept  of  the  addition 
is  omitted  although  this  concept  is  itself  a  factor 
of  factuality.  Thus  inexhaustibleness  is  the  prime 
character  of  factuality  as  disclosed  in  awareness ;  that 
is  to  say,  factuality  (even  as  in  individual  awareness) 
cannot  be  exhausted  by  any  definite  class  of  factors. 


16  THE  KELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [CH 

After  this  explanation  I  will  now  relapse  into  the  use 
of '  fact '  in  the  sense  of  '  factuality.' 

The  finiteness  of  consciousness,  the  factorisation  of 
fact,  the  individualisation  of  entities  in  cogitation,  and 
the  opposition  of  abstract  to  concrete  are  all  exhibitions 
of  the  same  truth  of  the  existence  of  limitation  within 
fact.  The  abstract  is  a  limitation  within  the  concrete, 
the  entity  is  a  limitation  within  totality,  the  factor  is  a 
limitation  within  fact,  and  consciousness  by  its  reference 
to  its  own  standpoint  within  fact  limits  fact  to  fact  as 
apprehended  in  consciousness.  The  treatment  of  the 
whole  theory  of  limitation  has  suffered  by  the  introduc 
tion  of  metaphors  derived  from  a  highly  particular  form 
of  it,  namely,  derived  from  the  analogy  between  extended 
things,  such  as  that  of  whole  to  part  and  that  of  things 
mutually  external  to  each  other. 

I  use  the  term  *  limitation '  for  the  most  general 
conception  of  fmitude.  In  a  somewhat  more  restricted 
sense  Bergson  uses  the  very  convenient  term  '  canalisa 
tion.'  This  Bergsonian  term  is  a  useful  one  to  keep  in 
mind  as  a  corrective  to  the  misleading  associations  of 
the  terms  '  external '  and  '  internal/  or  of  the  terms 
'whole'  and  'part.'  It  adds  also  a  content  to  the 
negative  term  'limitation.'  Thus  a  factor  is  a  limitation 
of  fact  in  the  sense  that  a  factor  refers  to  fact  canalised 
into  a  system  of  relata  to  itself,  i.e.  to  the  factor  in 
question.  The  mere  negative  limitation,  or  finitude,  in 
volved  in  a  factor  is  exhibited  in  cogitation,  wherein  the 
factor  degenerates  into  an  entity  and  the  canalisation 
degenerates  into  a  bundle  of  external  relations. 

Thus  also  finite  consciousness  is  a  limitation  of  fact, 
in  the  sense  that  it  is  a  factor  canalising  fact  in  ways 
peculiar  to  itself.  We  must  get  rid  of  the  notion  of 


ii]  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  17 

consciousness  as  a  little  box  with  some  things  inside  it. 
A  better  metaphor  is  that  of  the  contact  of  conscious 
ness  with  other  factors,  which  is  practically  Hume's 
metaphor  '  impression.'  But  this  metaphor  erroneously 
presupposes  that  fact  as  disclosed  in  awareness  can  be 
constructed  as  an  entity  formed  by  the  sum  of  the 
impressions  of  isolated  factors. 

Again  cogitation  is  a  further  limitation  of  fact  in  that 
it  is  a  canalisation  of  consciousness  so  as  to  divest  it  of 
the  crudeness  of  awareness.  This  illustrates  that  in 
limitation  there  is  a  gain  in  clarity,  or  definition,  or 
intensity,  but  a  loss  of  content. 

For  example,  the  factor  red  refers  to  fact  as  canalised 
by  relationships  of  other  factors  to  red,  and  the  entity 
red  is  the  factor  red  in  its  capacity  as  a  relatum  in  the 
relationship  of  contrast,  whereby  it  is  contrasted  with 
green  or  with  sound  or  with  the  moon  or  with  the 
multiplication  table.  Thus  the  factor  red,  essentially 
for  its  being,  occasions  the  exhibition  of  a  special  aspect 
of  fact,  and  the  entity  red  is  a  further  limitation  of  this 
aspect.  Similarly  the  number  three  is  nothing  else  than 
the  aspect  of  fact  as  factors  grouped  in  triplets.  And 
the  Tower  of  London  is  a  particular  aspect  of  the 
Universe  in  its  relation  to  the  banks  of  the  Thames. 
Thus  an  entity  is  an  abstraction  from  the  concrete, 
which  in  its  fullest  sense  means  totality. 

The  point  of  this  doctrine  on  which  I  want  to  insist 
is  that  any  factor,  by  virtue  of  its  status  as  a  limitation 
within  totality,  necessarily  refers  to  factors  of  totality 
other  than  itself.  It  is  therefore  impossible  to  find  any 
thing  finite,  that  is  to  say,  any  entity  for  cogitation, 
which  does  not  in  its  apprehension  by  consciousness 
disclose  relationships  to  other  entities,  and  thereby  dis- 
w.  R.  2 


18  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [CH 

close  some  systematic  structure  of  factors  within  fact. 
I  call  this  quality  of  finitude,  the  significance  of  factors. 
This  doctrine  of  significance  necessitates  that  we  admit 
that  awareness  requires  a  dual  cognisance  of  entities. 
There  can  be  awareness  of  a  factor  as  signifying,  and 
awareness  of  a  factor  as  signified.  In  a  sense  this  may 
be  represented  as  an  active  or  a  passive  cognisance  of 
the  entity.  The  entity  is  either  cognised  for  its  own 
sake,  that  is  to  say,  actively,  or  it  is  cognised  for  the 
sake  of  other  entities,  that  is  to  say,  passively.  If  an 
entity  is  cognised  actively,  it  is  cognised  for  the  sake 
of  what  it  is  in  itself,  for  the  sake  of  what  it  can  make 
of  the  universe.  I  will  call  this  sort  of  awareness  of  a 
factor,  cognisance  by  adjective;  since  it  is  the  character 
of  the  factor  in  itself  which  is  then  dominant  in  conscious 
ness.  Although  in  cognisance  by  adjective  an  entity  is 
apprehended  as  a  definite  character  in  its  relations  to 
other  entities,  yet  in  a  sense  this  type  of  cognisance 
marks  a  breakdown  in  relatedness.  For  the  general 
relatedness  of  the  character  to  other  factors  merely 
marks  the  fullness  of  its  content,  so  that  in  effect  the 
character  is  cognised  for  what  it  is  in  itself.  Relation 
ships  to  other  factors  occur  in  such  cognisance  only 
because  the  character  is  not  itself  apart  from  that 
ordering  of  fact. 

When  an  entity  is  cognised  passively,  we  are  aware 
of  it  for  the  sake  of  some  other  factor.  We  are  conscious 
passively  of  factor  A,  because  factor  B  of  which  we  are 
actively  aware  would  not  be  what  it  is  apart  from  its 
relatedness  to  A.  Thus  the  individual  character  of  A 
is  in  the  background,  and  A  becomes  a  vague  something 
which  is  an  element  in  a  complex  of  systematic  related- 
ness.  The  very  nature  of  the  relatedness  may  impose 


n]       THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE       19 

on  A  some  character.  But  the  character  is  gained 
through  the  relatedness  and  not  the  relatedness  through 
the  character.  Accordingly  A  gains  in  consciousness 
the  very  minimum  foothold  for  the  relationship  of 
contrast,  and  is  thus  the  most  shadowy  of  entities.  I 
will  call  this  sort  of  awareness  of  a  factor,  cognisance 
by  relatednoss.  For  example  the  knowledge  of  events 
inside  another  room  is  to  be  gained  by  their  spatial  and 
other  relationships  to  events  of  which  we  have  cognisance 
by  adjective. 

Thus  cognisance  of  one  factor  by  relatedness  pre 
supposes  cognisance  of  other  factors  by  adjective;  and 
conversely,  cognisance  of  one  factor  by  adjective  pre 
supposes  cognisance  of  other  factors  by  relatedness. 

It  is  possible  to  be  aware  of  a  factor  both  in  cognisance 
by  adjective  and  cognisance  by  relatedness.  This  will 
be  termed  '  full  awareness '  of  the  factor  and  is  the  usual 
form  of  awareness  of  factors  within  the  area  of  clear 
apprehension  when  intrinsic  characters  and  mutual 
relations  are  jointly  apparent.  'Perception'  will  be  the 
name  given  to  the  consciousness  of  a  factor  when  to 
full  awareness  cogitation  of  it  as  an  entity  is  also 
superadded. 

But  cogitation  does  not  necessarily  presuppose  full 
awareness.  For  the  contrast  involved  in  cogitation  may 
simply  fall  on  the  quality  of  the  individualities  of  the 
factors,  as  when  green  as  such  is  contrasted  with  red  as 
such.  In  such  a  case  merely  awareness  by  adjective  is 
presupposed.  But  the  contrast  may  also  fall  on  the 
specific  relationships  of  each  of  the  two  factors  to  other 
factors,  as  when  we  contrast  an  event  in  the  interior  of 
the  moon  with  another  event  in  the  interior  of  the 
earth.  The  spatio-temporal  relationships  of  the  two 

2—2 


20  THE  KELATEDNESS  OF  NATUKE  [CH 

events  are  then  contrasted ;  and  it  is  from  contrasts  of 
this  type  that  the  two  events  gain  their  definite 
individuality  as  entities. 

At  this  point  in  the  discussion  I  will  confine  the  scope 
of  the  remainder  of  my  lecture  strictly  to  the  considera 
tion  of  the  relatedness  of  nature.  This  requires  us  to 
recognise  another  limitation  within  awareness  which 
cuts  across  those  already  mentioned.  I  mean  the  limita 
tion  of  awareness  to  sense-awareness.  Nature  is  the 
system  of  factors  apprehended  in  sense-awareness.  But 
sense-awareness  can  only  be  defined  negatively  by 
enumerating  what  it  is  not. 

Divest  consciousness  of  its  ideality,  such  as  its  logical, 
emotional,  aesthetic  and  moral  apprehensions,  and  what 
is  left  is  sense-awareness.  Thus  sense-awareness  is 
consciousness  minus  its  apprehensions  of  ideality.  It  is 
not  asserted  that  there  is  consciousness  in  fact  divested 
of  ideality,  but  that  awareness  of  ideality  and  sense- 
awareness  are  two  factors  discernible  in  consciousness. 
The  question  as  to  whether  either  the  one  or  the  other, 
or  both  jointly  may  not  be  a  factor  necessary  for 
consciousness  is  beyond  the  scope  of  the  present  dis 
cussion.  The  finiteness  of  individual  consciousness  means 
ignorance  of  what  is  there  for  knowledge.  There  is 
limitation  of  factors  cognised  by  adjective,  and  equally 
there  is  limitation  of  factors  cognised  by  relatedness. 
So  it  is  perfectly  possible  to  hold,  as  I  do  hold,  that 
nature  is  significant  of  ideality,  without  being  at  all 
certain  that  there  may  not  be  some  awareness  of  nature 
without  awareness  of  ideality  as  signified  by  nature. 
It  would  have,  I  think,  to  be  a  feeble  awareness.  Per 
haps  it  is  more  likely  that  ideality  and  nature  are  dim 
together  in  dim  consciousness.  ~It  is  unnecessary  for  us 
to  endeavour  to  solve  these  doubts.  My  essential  premise 


nj       THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE      21 

is  that  we  are  conscious  of  a  certain  definite  assemblage 
of  factors  within  fact  and  that  this  assemblage  is 
what  I  call  nature.  Also  I  entirely  agree  that  the 
factors  of  nature  are  also  significant  of  factors  which 
are  not  included  in  nature.  But  I  propose  to  ignore 
this  admitted  preternatural  significance  of  nature,  and 
to  analyse  the  general  character  of  the  relatedness  of 
natural  entities  between  themselves. 

Nature  usually  presents  itself  to  our  imagination  as 
being  composed  of  all  those  entities  which  are  to  be 
found  somewhere  at  some  time.  Sabre-toothed  tigers 
are  part  of  nature  because  we  believe  that  somewhere 
and  at  some  time  sabre-toothed  tigers  were  prowling. 
Thus  an  essential  significance  of  a  factor  of  nature  is  its 
reference  to  something  that  happened  in  time  and  space. 
I  give  the  name  '  event '  to  a  spatio-temporal  happening. 
An  event  does  not  in  any  way  imply  rapid  change ;  the 
endurance  of  a  block  of  marble  is  an  event.  Nature 
presents  itself  to  us  as  essentially  a  becoming,  and  any 
limited  portion  of  nature  which  preserves  most  com 
pletely  such  concreteness  as  attaches  to  nature  itself  is 
also  a  becoming  and  is  what  I  call  an  event.  By  this  I 
do  not  mean  a  bare  portion  of  space- time.  Such  a 
concept  is  a  further  abstraction.  I  mean  a  part  of  the 
becomingness  of  nature,  coloured  with  all  the  hues  of 
its  content. 

Thus  nature  is  a  becomingness  of  events  which  are 
mutually  significant  so  as  to  form  a  systematic  structure. 
We  express  the  character  of  the  systematic  structure 
of  events  in  terms  of  space  and  time.  Thus  space  and 
time  are  abstractions  from  this  structure. 

Let  us  now  examine  more  particularly  the  significance 
of  events  in  so  far  as  it  falls  within  nature.  In  this  way 
we  are  treating  nature  as  a  closed  system,  and  this  I 


22  THE  EELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [OH 

believe  is  the  standpoint  of  natural  science  in  the  strict 
sense  of  the  term. 

But  before  embarking  on  the  details  of  this  investiga 
tion  I  should  like  to  draw  your  attention  to  an  objection, 
and  a  very  serious  objection,  which  is  urged  by  opponents 
of  the  whole  philosophic  standpoint  which  I  have  been 
developing.  You  admit,  it  is  said,  that  a  factor  is  not 
itself  apart  from  its  relations  to  other  factors.  Ac 
cordingly  to  express  any  truth  about  one  entity  you 
must  take  into  account  its  relations  to  all  entities.  But 
this  is  beyond  you.  Hence,  since  unfortunately  a  pro 
position  must  be  either  right  or  wrong  or  else  unmeaning 
and  a  mere  verbal  jangle,  the  attainment  of  truth  in 
any  finite  form  is  also  beyond  you. 

Now  I  do  not  think  that  it  is  any  answer  to  this 
argument  to  say  that  our  propositions  are  only  a  little 
wrong,  any  more  than  it  is  a  consolation  to  his  friends 
to  say  that  a  man  is  only  a  little  dead.  The  gist  of  the 
argument  is  that  on  our  theory  any  ignorance  is  blank 
ignorance,  because  knowledge  of  any  factor  requires  no 
ignorance.  A  philosophy  of  relatedness  which  cannot 
answer  this  argument  must  collapse,  since  we  have  got 
to  admit  ignorance. 

Obviously  if  this  argument  is  to  be  answered,  I  must 
guard  and  qualify  some  of  the  statements  which  have 
been  made  in  the  earlier  portion  of  this  lecture.  I  have 
put  off  the  job  until  now,  partly  for  the  sake  of  simplicity, 
not  to  say  too  much  at  once,  and  also  partly  because 
the  line  of  argument  is  most  clearly  illustrated  in  the 
case  of  nature,  and  indeed  the  application  to  nature  is 
the  only  one  in  which  for  the  purposes  of  this  lecture 
we  are  interested.  So  I  have  waited  until  my  discourse 
had  led  me  to  the  introduction  of  nature. 


ii]  THE  KELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  23 

The  answer  can  only  take  one  road,  we  must  dis 
tinguish  between  the  essential  and  the  contingent 
relationships  of  a  factor.  The  essential  relationships  of 
a  factor  are  those  relationships  which  are  inherent  in 
the  peculiar  individuality  of  the  factor,  so  that  apart 
from  them  the  factor  is  not  the  special  exhibition  of 
finitude  within  fact  which  it  is.  They  are  the  relation 
ships  which  place  the  factor  as  an  entity  amid  a  definite 
system  of  entities.  The  significance  of  a  factor  is  solely 
concerned  with  its  essential  relationships.  The  con 
tingent  relationships  of  a  factor  are  those  relationships 
between  that  factor  and  other  factors  which  might  be 
otherwise  without  change  of  the  particular  individuality 
of  the  factor.  In  other  words,  the  factor  would  be  what 
it  is  even  if  its  contingent  relationships  were  otherwise. 

Thus  awareness  of  a  factor  must  include  awareness 
of  its  essential  relationships,  and  is  compatible  with 
ignorance  of  its  contingent  relationships. 

It  is  evident  that  essential  and  contingent  relationships 
correspond  closely  to  internal  and  external  relations.  I 
hesitate  to  say  how  closely,  since  a  different  philosophic 
outlook  radically  affects  all  meanings. 

We  still  have  to  explain  how  awareness  of  a  factor 
can  exclude  ignorance  of  the  relationships  involved  in 
its  significance.  For,  on  the  face  of  it,  this  doctrine 
means  that  to  perceive  factor  A  we  require  also  to  per 
ceive  factors  B,  C,  D,  etc.,  which  A  signifies.  In  view 
of  the  possibilities  of  ignorance,  such  a  doctrine  appears 
to  be  extremely  doubtful.  This  objection  ignores  the 
analysis  of  awareness  into  cognisance  by  adjective  and 
cognisance  by  relatedness.  In  order  to  perceive  A  we  do 
not  require  to  be  conscious  of  B,  (7,  D,  with  cognisance 
by  adjective.  We  only  require  cognisance  by  relatedness. 


24  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [CH 

In  other  words  we  must  be  conscious  of  B,  C,  D,  ...  as 

entities  requisite  for  that  relatedness  to  A,  which  is  in 
volved  in  A's  significance.  But  even  this  explanation 
asks  for  too  much.  It  suggests  that  we  must  be  conscious 
of  B,  C,  D,  ...  as  a  definite  numerical  aggregate  of 
entities  signified  by  A.  Now  it  is  evident  that  no  factor 
A  makes  us  conscious  of  the  individual  entities  of  such 
an  aggregate.  Some  necessary  qualification  of  the  doc 
trine  of  significance  has  been  omitted.  The  missing 
principle  is  that  any  factor  A  has  to  be  uniformly 
significant.  [Every  entity  involves  that  fact  shall  be 
patient  of  it.JJThe  patience  of  fact  for  A  is  the  converse 
side  of  the  significance  of  A  within  fact.j  This  involves 
a  canalisation  within  fact ;  and  this  means  a  systematic 
aggregate  of  factors  each  with  the  uniform  impress  of 
the  patience  of  fact  for  A.  A  can  be,  because  they  are. 
Each  such  factor  individually  expresses  the  patience  of 
fact  for  A. 

Thus  the  knowledge  required  by  the  significance  of  A 
is  simply  this.  In  order  to  know  A  wejnust  ^now  how 
other  factors  express  the  patience  of  fact  for  A^  We 
need  not  be  aware  of  these  other  factors  individually, 
but  the  awareness  of  A  does  require  an  awareness  of 
their  defining  character.  There  is  no  such  entity  as  mere 
A  in  isolation.  A  requires  something  other  than  itself, 
namely,  factors  expressing  the  patience  of  fact  in  respect 
to  factor  A. 

Let  us  now  apply  to  nature  this  doctrine  of  uniform 
significance.  We  commence  by  taking  the  case  of  the 
colour  green.  When  we  perceive  green,  it  is  not  green 
in  isolation,  it  is  green  somewhere  at  some  time.  The 
green  may  or  may  not  have  the  relationship  to  some 
other  object,  such  as  a  blade  of  grass.  Such  a  relation 


n]      THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE       25 

would  be  contingent.  But  it  is  essential  that  we  see  it 
somewhere  in  space  related  to  our  eyes  at  a  certain 
epoch  of  our  bodily  life.  The  detailed  relationships  of 
green  to  our  bodily  life  and  to  the  situations  in  which 
it  is  apparent  to  our  vision  are  complex  and  variable  and 
partake  of  the  contingence  which  enables  us  to  remain 
ignorant  of  them.  But  there  can  be  no  knowledge  of 
green  without  apprehension  of  times  and  places.  Green 
presupposes  here  and  there,  and  now  and  then.  In  other 
words,  green  presupposes  the  passage  of  nature  in  the 
form  of  a  structure  of  events.  It  may  be  merely  green 
associated  vaguely  with  the  head,  green  all  about  me; 
but  green  is  not  green  apart  from  its  signification  of 
events  with  structural  coherence,  which  are  factors  ex 
pressing  the  patience  of  fact  for  green. 

A  blade  of  grass  is  an  object  of  another  type  which 
signifies  nature  as  a  passage  of  events.  In  this  respect 
it  only  differs  from  green  in  so  far  as  its  contingent 
relations  to  some  definite  events  are  perhaps  sharper 
and  capable  of  more  precise  determination. 

The  significance  of  events  is  more  complex.  In  the 
first  place  they  are  mutually  significant  of  each  other. 
The  uniform  significance  of  events  thus  becomes  the 
uniform  spatio-temporal  structure  of  events.  In  this 
respect  we  have  to  dissent  from  Einstein  who  assumes 
for  this  structure  casual  heterogeneity  arising  from  con 
tingent  relations.  Our  consciousness  also  discloses  to 
us  this  structure  as  uniformly  stratified  into  durations 
which  are  complete  nature  during  our  specious  presents. 
These  stratifications  exhibit  the  patience  of  fact  for 
finite  consciousness,  but  then  they  are  in  truth  charac 
ters  of  nature  and  not  illusions  of  consciousness. 

Returning  to  the  significance  of  events,  we  see  that 


26  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [OH 

there  is  no  such  thing  as  an  isolated  event.  Each  event 
essentially  signifies  the  whole  structure.  But  further 
more,  there  is  no  such  entity  as  a  bare  event.  Each 
event  also  signifies  objects,  other  than  events  which  are 
in  essential  "relation  to  it.  In  other  words  the  passage 
of  an  event  exhibits  objects  which  do  not  pass.  I  have 
termed  the  natural  factors  which  are  not  events  but  are 
implicated  in  events  '  objects,'  and  awareness  of  an  object 
is  what  I  have  termed  recognition.  Thus  green  is  an 
object  and  so  is  a  blade  of  grass,  and  awareness  of  green 
or  of  a  blade  of  grass  is  recognition.  Thus  an  event 
signifies  objects  in  mutual  relations.  The  particular 
objects  and  their  particular  relations  belong  to  the  sphere 
of  contingence ;  but  the  event  is  essentially  a  'field,'  in 
the  sense  that  without  related  objects  there  can  be  no 
event.  On  the  other  hand  related  objects  signify  events, 
and  without  such  events  there  are  no  such  objects. 

The  celebrated  two-termed  relationship  of  universals 
to  the  concrete  particulars  which  they  qualify  is  merely 
a  particular  example  of  the  general  doctrine  of  signifi 
cance  and  patience.  The  universals  are  significant  of 
their  particulars,  and  the  particulars  are  factors  ex 
hibiting  the  patience  of  fact  for  those  universals. 

But  in  the  apparent  world,  that  is  to  say,  in  the  world 
of  nature  disclosed  by  sense-awareness,  no  example  of 
the  simple  two-termed  relationship  of  a  universal  signi 
fying  its  particular  is  to  be  found.  Green  appears  to  an 
observer  in  a  situation  distinct  from  that  of  the  observer, 
but  simultaneous  with  it.  Thus  there  is  essential  refer 
ence  to  three  simultaneous  events,  the  event  which  is 
the  bodily  life  of  the  observer,  called  the  percipient 
event,  and  the  event  which  is  the  so-called  situation  of 
the  green  at  the  time  of  observation,  and  to  the  time  of 


n]       THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE       27 

observation  which  is  nothing  else  than  the  whole  of 
nature  at  that  time.  Under  the  obsession  of  the  logical 
theory  of  universals  and  concrete  particulars  the  per 
cipient  event  was  suppressed,  and  the  relation  of  green 
to  its  situation  represented  as  universal  qualifying  par 
ticular.  It  was  then  noted  that  this  relation  only  holds 
for  the  particular  observer,  and  that  furthermore  account 
must  be  taken  of  contingent  circumstances  such  as  the 
transmission  of  something,  which  is  not  the  colour  green, 
from  an  antecedent  situation  to  the  percipient  event. 

This  process,  of  first  presupposing  a  two-termed  re 
lation  and  then  finding  that  it  is  not  true,  has  led  to  the 
bifurcation  which  places  green  in  the  observer's  mind, 
qualifying  a  particular  also  in  the  observer's  mind ;  while 
the  whole  mental  process  has  some  undetermined  rela 
tion  to  another  system  of  entities  variously  described 
either  as  an  independent  physical  universe  in  some 
causal  relation  to  mind  or  as  a  conceptual  model. 

I  have  argued  elsewhere  in  detail  that  this  result  is 
untenable.  Here  I  will  only  remark  that  if  we  incline 
to  adopt  the  physical  universe,  we  can  find  no  shred  of 
evidence  for  it,  since  everything  apparent  for  conscious 
ness  has  been  accounted  for  as  being  in  the  observer's 
mind;  while,  if  we  turn  to  the  conceptual  model,  it  is 
also  the  model  for  the  same  consciousness.  Accordingly 
whichever  choice  we  make  there  will  be  no  shred  of 
evidence  for  anything  other  than  the  play  of  that  con 
sciousness  at  one  moment  of  self-realisation.  For  recol 
lection  and  anticipation  are  merely  the  play  of  immediate 
consciousness.  Thus  on  either  alternative,  solipsism 
only  is  left  and  very  little  of  that. 

Meanwhile  the  whole  difficulty  has  arisen  from  the 
initial  error  of  forcing  the  complex  relations  between 


28  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [OH 

green  and  the  structure  of  events  into  the  inadequate 
form  of  a  two-termed  relation. 

Yet  after  all  the  search  for  universals  to  qualify  events 
in  the  simple  two-termed  manner  does  represent  a 
justifiable  demand.  We  want  to  know  what  any  par 
ticular  event  A  is  in  itself  apart  from  its  reference  to 
other  events.  By  this  I  mean,  we  want  to  determine 
how  A  can  enter  into  a  two- termed  relation  of  contrast 
with  any  other  factor  X  without  having  necessarily  to 
enlarge  the  relationship  by  including  other  events  B, 
C,  D,  by  way  of  determining  A.  For  example,  the 
colour  green  is  in  itself  different  from  red,  and  we  do 
not  have  to  specify  green  or  red  by  their  diverse  relation 
ships  amid  events  in  order  to  appreciate  their  contrast. 
Now  we  want  to  do  much  the  same  thing  for  events,  so 
as  to  feel  that  an  event  has  a  character  of  its  own.  We 
have  seen  that  the  immediate  objects  of  the  apparent 
world  such  as  colours  do  not  satisfy  the  requisite 
conditions  since  their  reference  to  events  involves  the  re 
lations  of  the  percipient  event  to  the  so-called  situation. 
I  call  such  objects  of  immediate  appearance,  sense- 
objects.  Colours,  sounds,  smells,  touches,  pushes,  bodily 
feelings,  are  sense-objects.  But  after  all,  the  way  we 
do  connect  these  sense -objects,  as  I  call  them,  with 
their  situations  shows  that  awareness  of  an  event  carries 
with  it  apprehension  of  that  event  as  patient  of  a 
character  qualifying  it  individually.  In  fact  every  event 
signifies  a  character  for  itself  alone,  but  what  exactly 
that  character  may  be  lies  within  the  sphere  of  con 
tingency  and  is  not  disclosed  in  our  immediate  conscious 
ness  of  the  apparent  world.  I  will  call  such  a  character 
an  adjective  of  its  event.  An  adjective  marks  a  break 
down  in  relativity  by  the  very  simplicity  of  the  two- 


ii]  THE  KELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  29 

termed  relation  it  involves.  The  discovery  of  these 
missing  adjectives  is  the  task  of  natural  science.  The 
primary  aim  of  science  is  to  contract  the  sphere  of  con 
tingency  by  discovering  adjectives  of  events  such  that 
the  history  of  the  apparent  world  in  the  future  shall  be 
the  outcome  of  the  apparent  world  in  the  past.  There 
obviously  is  some  such  dependence,  and  it  is  the  pur 
pose  of  science  to  express  this  dependence  in  terms  of 
adjectives  qualifying  events.  In  order  to  understand 
this  procedure  of  science,  there  are  three  concepts  which 
we  must  understand.  They  are 

(i)  The  structure  of  the  four  dimensional  continuum, 
(ii)  Pervasive  adjectives  and  adjectival  particles,  * 
(iii)  The  atomic  field  of  an  adjectival  particle. 
I  will  conclude  this  lecture  by  considering  them  in  order. 

(i)   The  structure  of  the  continuum  of  events 

This  structure  is  four-dimensional,  so  that  any  event 
is  a  four-dimensional  hyper-volume  in  which  time  is  the 
fourth  dimension.  But  we  should  not  conceive  an  event 
as  space  and  time,  but  as  a  unit  from  which  space  and 
time  are  abstracts. 

An  event  with  all  its  dimensions  ideally  restricted  is 
called  an  'event-particle/  and  an  event  with  only  one 
dimension  of  finite  extension  is  called  a  'route'  or  'path/ 
I  will  not  in  this  lecture  discuss  the  meaning  of  this  ideal 
restriction.  I  have  investigated  it  elsewhere  under  the 
name  of  'extensive  abstraction.' 

The  structure  is  uniform  because  of  the  necessity  for 
knowledge  that  there  be  a  system  of  uniform  relatedness, 
in  terms  of  which  the  contingent  relations  of  natural 
factors  can  be  expressed.  Otherwise  we  can  know 


30  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [OH 

nothing  until  we  know  everything.  If  P  be  any  event- 
particle,  a  moment  through  P  is  a  system  of  event- 
particles  representing  all  nature  instantaneously  con 
temporaneous  with  P.  According  to  the  classical  view 
of  time  there  can  be  only  one  such  moment.  According 
to  the  modern  view  there  can  be  an  indefinite  number 
of  alternative  moments  through  P,  each  corresponding 
to  a  different  meaning  for  time  and  space.  A  moment 
is  an  instantaneous  three-dimensional  section  of  nature 
and  is  the  entity  indicated  when  we  speak  of  a  moment 
of  time. 

The  aggregate  of  event-particles  lying  on  moments 
through  P  will  be  called  the  region  co-present  with  P. 
The  remainder  of  the  four-dimensional  continuum  is 
divided  by  the  co-present  region  into  two  regions,  one 
being  P's  past  and  the  other  being  P's  future.  The  three- 
dimensional  boundary  between  P's  past  and  P's  co- 
present  region  is  P's  causal  past,  and  the  corresponding 
boundary  between  P's  future  and  P's  co-present  region 
is  P's  causalfuture.  The  remaining  portion  of  P's  future 
is  P's  kinematic  future. 

A  route  lying  entirely  in  one  moment  is  called  a 
spatial  route,  and  a  route  which  lies  entirely  in  the  past 
and  future  of  each  one  of  its  event-particles  is  called  a 
historical*  route. 

(ii)  Pervasive  adjectives  and  adjectival  particles 

We  gain  great  simplicity  of  explanation,  without  loss 
of  any  essential  considerations  by  confining  our  con 
sideration  of  events  to  routes.  These  routes  are  of  course 
not  true  events,  but  merely  ideal  limits  with  only  one 
dimensional  extension  remaining. 

*  I  borrow  the  term  'historical'  from  Prof.  C.  D.  Broad. 


II] 


THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE 


31 


32  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [CH 

A  factor  will  be  said  to  be  an  adjective  pervading  a 
route  when  it  is  an  adjective  of  every  stretch  of  the 
route.  Such  a  factor  will  be  called  a  pervasive  adjective, 
or  uniform  object.  I  think — without  being  very  certain 
— that  true  pervasive  adjectives  are  only  to  be  found 
qualifying  historical  routes ;  but  that  pervasive  pseudo- 
adjectives  also  qualify  spatial  routes.  The  essential 
difference  between  time  and  space  finds  its  illustration  in 
the  difference  between  these  two  different  types  of  route. 

As  an  illustration  of  pervasive  adjectives,  consider  a 
mass-particle  m.  The  enduring  existence  of  this  particle 
marks  out  a  historical  route  amid  the  structure  of  events. 
In  fact  the  mass-particle  is  merely  a  pervasive  adjective 
of  that  route,  since  it  is  an  adjective  qualifying  in  the 
same  sense  every  stretch  of  that  route.  But  here  a 
further  explanation  is  necessary.  The  mass-particle  as 
a  pervasive  adjective  is  a  universal  and  has  lost  its 
concrete  individuality. 

Another  mass-particle  of  the  same  mass  pervading 
another  historical  route  is  the  same  pervasive  adjective 
also  qualifying  every  stretch  of  that  other  route.  It 
follows  that  the  separate  concrete  individualities  of  the 
two  mass-particles  arise  from  the  separate  individualities 
of  their  two  historical  routes.  Thus  a  concrete  mass- 
particle  is  the  fusion  of  a  pervasive  adjective  with  the 
individuality  of  a  historical  route.  We  say  that  a  mass- 
particle  is  situated  at  each  event -particle  of  its  historical 
route.  I  will  call  a  pervasive  adjective  as  qualifying  a 
particular  historical  route  an  ' adjectival  particle.'  The 
principle  underlying  the  conception  of  an  adjectival 
particle  is  that  the  individual  embodiment  of  character 
always  involves  process  and  that  this  process  is  here 
represented  by  the  historical  route. 


ii]  THE  KELATEDNESS  OF  NATUKE  33 

Spatial  routes  cannot  be  pervaded  by  mass- particles. 
Thus  if  a  mass-particle  of  the  same  mass  be  situated  at 
each  event-particle  of  a  spatial  route,  that  route  is  not 
pervaded  by  the  one  adjective  which  is  the  same  uni 
versal  for  each  of  the  concrete  mass-particles.  In  fact  a 
stretch  of  the  spatial  route  is  qualified  by  quite  a  differ 
ent  adjective,  which  represents  the  sum  of  the  masses 
situated  at  the  event-particles  of  the  stretch.  Accord 
ingly  spatial  routes  and  historical  routes  function  quite 
differently  in  respect  to  the  adjective  'mass  w,'  and  thus 
illustrate  the  difference  between  the  spread  of  space  and 
the  lapse  of  time. 

There  are  however  pseudo-adjectives  which  do  pervade 
spatial  routes.  Consider  a  sense-object,  such  as  the 
colour  red.  It  is  not  a  true  adjective  of  its  situation, 
since  there  is  always  a  necessary  reference  to  a  per 
cipient  event.  But  for  the  one  observer  conscious  of  the 
natural  relations  of  that  percipient  event,  who  is  pre 
supposing  this  reference  to  his  bodily  life  as  a  condition 
for  appearance,  the  colour  red  is  an  adjective  of  its 
situation.  But  any  part  of  its  situation  is  also  red, 
neither  more  nor  less  so  than  the  whole  enduring  patch 
of  red.  Thus  red  pervades  its  situation.  However  I  have 
already  argued  at  length  that  sense-objects  are  not  true 
adjectives.  They  simulate  adjectives  for  an  observer 
who  in  his  intellectual  analysis  of  the  circumstances 
forgets  to  mention  himself.  Accordingly  they  may  be 
called  pervasive  pseudo-adjectives. 

The  common  material  objects  of  perception,  such  as 
chairs,  stones,  planets,  trees,  etc.,  are  adjectival  bodies 
pervading  the  historical  events  which  they  qualify.  In 
so  expressing  myself,  I  have  gone  beyond  the  ideal 
simplicity  of  a  route,  and  the  terms  'pervasion'  and 
w.  R.  3 


34  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [CH 

'historical  event'  require,  strictly  speaking,  a  more 
elaborate  explanation  than  I  have  yet  given.  In  this 
lecture  however  it  is  unnecessary  to  undertake  the  task, 
and  I  need  only  refer  to  my  Principles  of  Natural 
Knowledge  where  the  requisite  definitions  are  given  in 
connection  with  uniform  objects. 


(iii)   The  atomic  field  of  an  adjectival  particle 

Science  has  been  driven  to  have  recourse  to  more 
precisely  delimited  adjectival  objects  than  these  ad 
jectival  objects  of  perception.  The  standard  types  of 
such  objects  are  mass-particles  and  electrons;  and  we 
will  fall  back  on  our  ideal  simplicities  by  conceiving 
them  as  adjectival  particles  defined,  as  above,  for  the 
ideal  simplification  of  historical  routes. 

Now  the  essence  of  an  adjectival  object,  whether  it 
be  the  unprecise  object  of  perception  or  the  more  precise 
object  of  science,  is  that  it  reduces  the  contingency  of 
nature.  It  is  an  adjective  of  events  which  to  some  extent 
conditions  the  possibilities  of  apparent  sense-objects. 

It  must  be  admitted  that  it  is  itself  a  contingent 
adjective.  But  owing  to  the  simplicity  of  the  relation 
of  an  adjective  to  its  qualified  substance,  it  involves  a 
simpler  contingency  than  the  contingency  of  the  complex 
relationships  of  sense-objects.  In  other  words  we  are 
limiting  contingency  by  the  fixed  conditions  which  are 
the  laws  of  nature. 

It  is  evident  therefore  that  a  scientific  object  must 
qualify  future  events.  For  otherwise  the  future  contin 
gency  is  unaffected  by  it.  In  this  a  scientific  object 
differs  decisively  from  a  sense-object  viewed  as  a  pseudo- 
adjective.  A  sense-object  qualifies  events  in  the  present. 


ii]  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  35 

It  is  confined  to  a  spatial  region  with  the  minimum  of 
historicity  requisite  for  the  duration  of  the  present. 
Whereas  the  scientific  object  qualifies  a  region  extending 
from  the  present  into  the  future.  Thus  the  seemingly 
contingent  play  of  the  senses  is  controlled  by  the 
conditions  introduced  by  its  dependence  upon  the 
qualification  of  events  introduced  by  scientific  objects. 
A  scientific  object  qualifies  the  future  in  two  ways, 
(a)  by  its  permanence  and  (b)  by  its  field. 

Let  us  take  the  permanence  first.  The  permanence 
of  an  adjectival  particle  lets  us  know  that  there  will  be 
some  historical  route  pervaded  by  that  particle.  It  does 
not  in  itself  tell  us  more  than  that  some  pervaded  route 
will  stretch  into  the  future  from  the  situation  in  the 
present.  The  permanence  of  the  unique  particle  is 
nothing  else  than  the  continuity  of  the  unique  historical 
route,  and  its  pervasion  by  the  adjectival  particle. 

The  further  laws  of  physical  science  represent  the 
further  conditions  which  determine,  or  partially  deter 
mine,  the  particular  historical  routes  pervaded  by  these 
adjectival  particles.  The  most  simple  expression  of  such 
a  law  consists  in  associating  an  atomic  field  with  each 
adjectival  particle  as  situated  in  each  one  of  the  event- 
particles  of  ifys  pervaded  route.  Again  this  association 
of  the  field  represents  another  eruption  of  contingency, 
but  also  again  this  contingency  is  of  a  simple  defined 
type.  The  field  of  an  adjectival  particle  m  at  a  situation 
P  is  a  limited  region  stretching  from  P  into  P's  futurity. 
This  region  is  qualified  by  an  adjective  dependent  upon 
m  and  P  only.  For  this  simple  type  of  law,  the  only 
limited  region  which  can  satisfy  this  demand  is  the  three- 
dimensional  boundary  region  between  P's  co-present 
and  P's  kinematic  future.  I  have  called  this  region  P's 

3—2 


36  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [CH 

causal  future.  Accordingly  the  field  of  m  at  P  must  be 
P's  causal  future.  Expressing  this  statement  in  terms 
of  one  consistent  meaning  for  time  and  its  associated- 
permanent  space,  we  first  note  that  P  consists  of  a  point 
SP  at  a  time  tp,  and  m  situated  in  P  means  m  at  the 
point  SP  at  the  time  tr.  The  causal  future  of  P  means 
those  points  SB,  at  times  tB  [i.e.  those  event-particles 
such  as  B],  reached  by  a  physical  character  due  to  m,  and 
starting  from  SP  at  time  tp  and  arriving  at  SB  at  time 
tB9  and  travelling  with  the  critical  maximum  velocity  c. 

Experiment  shows  that  this  critical  maximum  velocity 
is  a  near  approximation  to  the  velocity  of  light  in  vacuo, 
but  its  definition  in  no  way  depends  upon  any  reference 
to  light.  Thus  the  adjectival  character  of  the  field  of 
m  Sit  P  consists  in  the  correlated  physical  characters 
of  the  different  event-particles  of  the  field.  The  whole 
conception  is  practically  the  familiar  one  of  tubes 
of  force,  with  one  exception.  A  tube  of  force  is  con 
ceived  statically  as  a  simultaneous  character  stretching 
through  space.  This  statical  conception  destroys  the 
true  individuality  of  a  tube  by  piecing  together  frag 
ments  of  different  tubes.  As  we  pass  along  a  tube 
radiating  from  SP  we  keep  to  the  same  tube  by  allowing 
for  the  lapse  of  time  required  by  the  velocity  c. 

The  peculiar  correlation  of  adjectives  attaching  to  the 
various  event-particles  of  the  field  of  m  at  P  will  depend 
upon  the  particular  contingent  law  which  science  con 
jectures  to  be  the  true  expression  of  m's  physical  status. 

There  are,  also,  less  simple  laws  of  nature  for  which 
the  influence  of  the  contingent  configurations  of  other 
adjectival  particles  will  be  essential  factors.  Such  laws 
will  in  general  involve  the  deflection  of  the  field  of  m  at 
P  from  P's  causal  future  into  P's  kinematic  future.  The 


ii]  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  37 

region  will  be  dependent  upon  the  fields  of  the  other 
relevant  adjectival  particles.  It  is  evident  that  with 
such  laws  we  are  rapidly  drifting  towards  the  difficulty 
of  having  to  know  everything  before  knowing  any 
thing. 

I  will  call  such  fields  '  obstructed  fields.'  Differential 
equations  help  us  here.  But  even  their  aid  would  be 
unavailing  unless  we  could  approximate  from  the  first 
assumption  of  unobstructed  fields  for  the  adjectival 
particles  producing  the  obstruction.  In  this  way  the 
influence  of  gravitation  upon  the  electromagnetic  field 
can  be  calculated  and  vice  versa. 

This  account  of  the  status  of  scientific  objects  com 
pletely  changes  the  status  of  the  ether;  from  that 
presumed  in  nineteenth  century  science.  In  the  classical 
doctrine  the  ether  is  the  shy  agent  behind  the  veil :  in 
the  account  given  here  the  ether  is  exactly  the  apparent 
world,  neither  more  nor  less.  The  apparent  world  dis 
closes  itself  to  us  as  the  ingression  of  sense-objects  amid 
events.  In  this  statement  the  term  'ingression'  is  used 
for  the  complex  relationship  of  those  abstract  elements 
of  the  world,  such  as  sense-objects,  which  are  devoid 
of  becomingness  and  extension,  to  those  other  more 
concrete  elements  (events)  which  retain  becomingness 
and  extension.  But  a  bare  event  is  a  mere  abstraction. 
Events  are  disclosed  as  involved  in  this  relationship  of 
ingression.  This  disclosure  is  our  perceptual  vision  of 
the  apparent  world.  We  now  ask  on  behalf  of  science 
whether  we  cannot  simplify  the  regulative  principles 
discerned  in  this  apparent  world  by  treating  events  as 
something  more  than  relata  in  the  relationship  of  in 
gression.  Cannot  we  discern  true  Aristotelian  qualities 
as  attaching  to  the  events  ?  Is  not  each  event  something 


38  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  [CH 

in  itself,  apart  from  its  status  as  a  mere  relatum 
in  the  relationship  of  ingression  \  The  apparent  world 
itself  gives  an  answer,  partially  in  the  affirmative. 
Chairs,  tables,  and  perceptual  objects  generally,  have 
lost  the  complexity  of  ingression,  and  appear  as  the 
required  Aristotelian  adjectives  of  some  events.  Their 
appearance  involves  that  borderline  where  sense-aware 
ness  is  fusing  with  thought.  It  is  difficult  to  make  any 
account  of  them  precise.  In  fact,  for  the  purpose  of 
science  they  suffer  from  incurable  vagueness.  But  they 
mark  the  focal  centres  to  be  used  as  the  radiating 
centres  for  an  exact  account  of  true  Aristotelian  adjec 
tives  without  any  of  those  qualifications  here  referred 
to  as  *  vagueness.'  The  events  of  the  apparent  world 
as  thus  qualified  by  the  exact  adjectives  of  science  are 
what  we  call  the  '  ether.'  Accordingly  in  my  previous 
work,  The  Principles  of  Natural  Knowledge,  I  have 
phrased  it  in  this  way,  that  the  older  '  ether  of  stuff' 
is  here  supplanted  by  an  *  ether  of  events.' 

This  line  of  thought,  supplanting  'stuff*  by  'events,' 
and  conceiving  events  as  involving  process  and  exten 
sion  and  contingent  qualities  and  as  primarily  relata  in 
the  relationship  of  ingression,  is  a  recurrence  to  Des 
cartes'  views — with  a  difference.  Descartes,  like  the 
rest  of  the  world  at  that  time,  completely  dissociated 
space  and  time.  He  assigned  extension  to  space,  and 
process  to  time.  It  is  true  that  time  involves  extension 
of  some  sort,  but  that  does  not  seem  to  have  coloured 
his  philosophy.  Now  according  to  Descartes  'extension' 
is  an  abstract  from  the  more  concrete  concept  of  '  stuff.' 
He,  like  the  rest  of  the  world,  considers  stuff  as  being 
separable  from  the  concept  of  '  process,'  so  that  stuff 
fully  realises  itself  at  an  instant,  without  duration. 


ii]  THE  RELATEDNESS  OF  NATURE  39 

Space  is  thus  a  property  of  stuff,  and  accordingly  follows 
stuff  in  being  essentially  dissociated  from  time.  He  there 
fore  deduces  that  space  is  an  essential  timeless  plenum. 
It  is  merely  an  abstract  from  the  concrete  world  of 
appearance  at  an  instant.  If  there  be  no  stuff  to  appear, 
there  can  be  no  space. 

Now  re-write  this  Cartesian  account  of  space,  sub 
stituting  'events'  (which  retain  'process')  for  'stuff' 
(which  has  lost  '  process ').  You  then  return  to  my  ac 
count  of  space-time,  as  an  abstract  from  events  which 
are  the  ultimate  repositories  of  the  varied  individualities 
in  nature.  But  space  as  pure  extension,  dissociated  from 
process,  and  time  as  pure  serial  process,  are  correlative 
abstractions  which  can  be  made  in  different  ways,  each 
way  representing  a  real  property  of  nature.  In  this 
manner  the  alternative  spaces  and  the  alternative  times, 
which  have  already  been  mentioned,  are  seen  to  be 
justifiable  conceptions,  according  to  the  account  of  the 
immediate  deliverances  of  awareness  here  given,  provided 
that  our  experience  can  be  thereby  explained. 

Mere  deductive  logic,  whether  you  clothe  it  in  mathe 
matical  symbols  and  phraseology  or  whether  you  enlarge 
its  scope  into  a  more  general  symbolic  technique,  can 
never  take  the  place  of  clear  relevant  initial  concepts 
of  the  meaning  of  your  symbols,  and  among  symbols 
I  include  words.  If  you  are  dealing  with  nature,  your 
meanings  must  directly  relate  to  the  immediate  facts  of 
observation.  We  have  to  analyse  first  the  most  general 
characteristics  of  things  observed,  and  then  the  more 
casual  contingent  occurrences.  There  can  be  no  true 
physical  science  which  looks  first  to  mathematics  for  the 
provision  of  a  conceptual  model.  Such  a  procedure  is  to 
repeat  the  errors  of  the  logicians  of  the  middle-ages. 


CHAPTER  III 

EQUALITY 

THE  criticism  of  the  meanings  of  simple  obvious  state 
ments  assumes  especial  importance  when  any  large 
reorganisation  of  current  ideas  is  in  progress.  The  up 
heaval  produced  by  the  Einstein  doctrine  of  relativity 
is  a  case  in  point.  It  demands  a  careful  scrutiny  of  the 
fundamental  ideas  of  physical  science  in  general  and  of 
mathematical  physics  in  particular.  I  propose  therefore 
in  this  lecture  to  take  one  of  the  simplest  mathematical 
notions  which  we  all  come  across  when  we  start  mathe 
matics  in  our  early  school  life  and  to  ask  what  it 
means. 

The  example  I  have  chosen  is  the  notion  of  ' equality.' 
There  is  hardly  a  page  or  a  paragraph  of  any  mathe 
matical  book  which  does  not  employ  this  idea.  It 
appears  in  geometry  in  the  more  specialised  form  of 
congruence. 

If  I  am  not  mistaken,  clear  notions  on  equality  are 
of  decisive  importance  for  the  sound  reconstruction  of 
mathematical  physics.  Congruence  is  a  more  special 
term  than  equality,  being  confined  to  mean  the  quanti 
tative  equality  of  geometrical  elements.  Equality  is  also 
closely  allied  to  the  idea  of  quantity;  but  here  again 
I  think  that  equality  touches  the  more  general  ideas. 
The  consideration  of  quantity  necessarily  introduces 
that  of  measurement.  In  fact  the  scope  of  a  discussion 
on  quantity  may  be  defined  by  the  question,  How  is 
measurement  possible?  Lastly,  equality  has  an  obvious 
affinity  with  identity.  Some  philosophers  in  considering 


CH  m]  EQUALITY  41 

the  foundations  of  mathematics  would  draw  no  distinc 
tion  between  the  two.  In  certain  usages  of  equality 
this  may  be  the  case.  But  it  cannot  be  the  whole  truth. 
For  if  it  were,  the  greater  part  of  mathematics  would 
consist  of  a  reiteration  of  the  tautologous  statement 
that  a  thing  is  itself.  We  are  interested  in  equality 
because  diversity  has  crept  in. 

In  fact  a  discussion  of  equality  embraces  in  its 
scope  congruence,  quantity,  measurement,  identity  and 
diversity.  The  importance  of  equality  was  discovered 
by  the  Greeks.  We  all  know  Euclid's  axiom,  'Things 
that  are  equal  to  the  same  thing  are  also  equal  to  one 
another'  (TO,  TO)  avrq)  Lcra  /cat  aAA^Xoi?  tcn\v  icra).  This 
axiom  deserves  its  fame,  in  that  it  is  one  of  the  first 
efforts  to  clarify  thought  by  an  accurate  statement  of 
premises  habitually  assumed.  It  is  the  most  conspicuous 
example  of  the  decisive  trend  of  Greek  thought  towards 
rigid  accuracy  in  detailed  expression,  to  which  we  owe 
our  modern  philosophy,  our  modern  science,  and  the 
creeds  of  the  Christian  Church.  But  grateful  as  we  are 
to  the  Greeks  for  this  axiom  and  for  the  whole  state  of 
mind  which  it  indicates,  we  cannot  withdraw  it  from 
philosophic  scrutiny.  The  whole  import  of  the  axiom 
depends  on  the  meaning  of  the  word  tcro?,  equal.  What 
do  we  mean  when  we  say  that  one  thing  is  equal  to 
another?  Suppose  we  explain  by  stating  that  'equal' 
means  'equal  in  magnitude,'  that  is  to  say,  the  things 
are  quantities  of  the  same  magnitude.  But  what  is  a 
quantity?  If  we  define  it  as  having  the  property  of 
being  measurable  in  terms  of  a  unit,  we  are  thrown 
back  upon  the  equality  of  different  examples  of  the  same 
unit.  It  is  evident  that  we  are  in  danger  of  soothing 
ourselves  with  a  vicious  circle  whereby  equality  is 


42  EQUALITY  [CH 

explained  by  reference  to  quantity  and  quantity  by 
reference  to  equality. 

Let  us  first  drop  the  special  notion  of  quantitative 
equality  and  consider  the  most  general  significance  of 
that  notion.  The  relation  of  equality  denotes  a  possible 
diversity  of  things  related  but  an  identity  of  character 
qualifying  them.  It  is  convenient  for  technical  facility 
in  the  arrangement  of  deductive  trains  of  reasoning  to 
allow  that  a  thing  is  equal  to  itself,  so  that  equality 
includes  identity  as  a  special  case.  But  this  is  a  mere 
matter  of  arbitrary  definition. 

The  important  use  of  equality  is  when  there  is 
diversity  of  things  related  and  identity  of  character. 
This  identity  of  character  must  not  be  mere  identity 
of  the  complete  characters.  For  in  that  case,  by  the 
principle  of  the  identity  of  indiscernables,  the  equal 
things  would  be  necessarily  identical. 

Accordingly  when  we  write 

A=B 

we  are  referring  implicitly  to  some  character  and  asserting 
that  A  and  B  both  possess  it.  The  assertion  of  equality 
is  therefore  generally  couched  in  a  highly  elliptical  form 
since  the  expression  of  the  character  in  question  is 
often  omitted.  This  is  a  source  of  most  of  the  confused 
thinking  which  haunts  discussion  on  this  subject.  Let 
us  remedy  our  notation  so  as  to  rid  it  of  its  misleading 
ellipticity.  Let  (cl}c2, . . . ,  cn)  denote  a  class  of  characters 
clt  ca,  ... ,  cn,  such  as  colour  for  example. 
Then  we  write 

A=B-*(cl9ca,  ...,  cn) 

to  mean  that  A  and  B  both  possess  the  same  character 
out  of  the  set  (clt  c2,  ... ,  cn);  and  we  write 

tfa.c,,  ...,cn) 


m]  EQUALITY  43 

to  mean  that  different  characters  out  of  the  set  apply 
to  A  and  B  respectively.  Our  notation  still  has  the 
defect  of  implying  that  the  class  of  characters  is  a  finite 
or  at  least  an  enumerable  class.  Let  us  therefore  take 
y  to  represent  this  class,  so  that 


means  that  the  same  member  of  the  class  y  qualifies 
both  A  and  B\  and 


means  that  one  member  of  y  qualifies  A  and  that  another 
member  of  y  qualifies  B.  I  will  call  y  the  'qualifying 
class.' 

It  is  now  evident  that 

A=B-*y 
and  Z?=(7->y 

implies  that  A  =  (7—>y. 

This  is  evidently  a  general  rendering  of  Euclid's  first 
axiom. 

But  we  are  not  yet  at  the  end  of  our  discussion.    In 
the  first  place,  we  cannot  yet  prove  that 

A=B-*y 
and  A^B-*y 

are  incompatible  with  each  other.  For  we  have  not  yet 
excluded  the  case  that  more  than  one  character  of  the 
set  y  may  attach  either  to  A  or  to  B  or  to  both.  For 
example  if  ^  and  c2  are  members  of  y,  both  attaching  to 
A,  but  only  cx  attaching  to  B,  then  both 

A=B-*y 
and 


Accordingly   we  must  re-define  the  meaning   of  our 


44  EQUALITY  [CH 

symbols  by  introducing  the  additional  limitation  that 

A=B-*y 
and  A^B-^y 

both  mean  that  A  and  B  each  possess  one  and  only  one 
character  of  the  class  y.  It  is  well  to  note  that  the  two 
propositions  represented  by  these  symbolic  statements 
are  only  contraries  to  each  other.  For  though  they 
cannot  both  be  true,  they  will  both  be  false  if  either  A 
or  B  does  not  possess  any  character  out  of  the  qualifying 
class  y.  For  example  if  A  does  not  possess  any  such 
quality  or  if  it  possesses  two  such  qualities,  then 

A=A->y 
and  A  =j=  A  ->  y 

are  both  false.  This  example  also  illustrates  the  sharp 
distinction  between  equality  and  mere  identity. 

In  this  most  general  sense  of  equality,  the  notion  of 
'matching/  in  the  sense  in  which  colours  match,  might 
with  advantage  replace  equality,  so  that  we  should 

interpret 

A=B-+y  and  A  =f  B -> y 

as  meaning  respectively 

'A  matches  B  in  respect  to  the  qualities  y' 
and 

'A  does  not  match  B  in  respect  to  the  qualities  y! 
This   verbal    statement   in   its   common  meaning  pre 
supposes  our  three  conditions : 

(i)    that  A  and  B  each  possess  one  of  the  qualities  y, 

(ii)  that  neither^  nor  B  possesses  more  than  one  such 
quality, 

(iii)  that  A    and   B  possess   the   same  one  of  the 


m]  EQUALITY  45 

qualities  y,  and  (in  the  second  case)  that  A  and  B  do 
not  possess  the  same  one  of  the  qualities. 

The  set  of  entities  such  as  A  and  B  possessing  one  and 
only  one  of  the  qualities  of  the  class  y  will  be  said  to 
form  the  'qualified  class  for  y,'  and  we  have  already 
named  y  the  'qualifying  class.' 

Congruence.  Congruence  is  a  subspecies  of  the  general 
type  of  the  equality  relation.  Let  us  start  with  the 
simplest  example  and  consider  a  one-dimensional  space. 
The  points  of  this  space  are  terms  interconnected  by  a 
relation  which  arranges  them  in  serial  order  with  the 
ordinary  continuity  of  the  Dedekindian  type.  The 
points  may  be  connected  by  other  relations  which  sort 
them  out  in  other  ways ;  but  when  we  say  that  they 
form  a  one-dimensional  space,  we  are  thinking  of  one 
definite  relation  which  produces  the  continuous  serial 
order,  both  ways  infinite. 

Now  in  the  particularising  of  the  equality  relation  so 
as  to  produce  a  congruence  relation  for  this  space,  we 
first  demand  that,  if  y  be  the  qualifying  class,  the  class 
qualified  by  y  must  be  composed  of  all  the  finite 
stretches  of  the  space.  Thus  the  terms  A,  B,  etc.  in 
the  previous  explanation  of  equality  are  now  stretches 
of  the  serial  space,  and  every  finite  stretch  belongs  to 
the  qualified  class.  It  will  be  convenient  to  confine 
attention  to  those  stretches  which  include  their  two 
end-points.  Let  two  stretches  which  do  not  overlap, 
except  that  they  have  one  end-point  in  common,  be 
called  adjoined  stretches,  or  stretches  adjoined  at  that 
end-point. 

Now  the  conditions  which  have  to  be  fulfilled  in  order 
that  this  type  of  equality  may  reckon  as  a  congruence 
are: 


46  EQUALITY  [CB 

(i)  If  A  be  any  stretch  and  p  any  point,  there  ar^ 
two  stretches  P1  and  P2  adjoined  at  p,  such  that 

and  A  =  P2  ->  y. 

In  other  words,  from  a  given  point  p  stretches  of  ai 
assigned  length  can  be  measured  in  either  direction. 

(ii)  If  P  and  Q  are  two  stretches,  and  P  contains  Q,  • 
then 


In  other  words,  the  whole  is  unequal  to  its  part. 

(iii)  If  P  and  Q  be  two  stretches,  and  P  be  composed 
of  the  adjoint  stretches  Px  and  P2,  and  Q  of  the  adjoint 
stretches  Ql  and  Qz,  and  furthermore  if 

and  P2  =  Qz  ->  y, 

then  P  =Q  — >  y. 

In  other  words,  if  equals  be  added  to  equals  the  wholes 
are  equal. 

(iv)  If  the  first  clause  of  the  hypothesis  of  (iii)  hold, 
and  furthermore  if 

P=  Q   -»y 

and  P1=Q1-+  y, 

then  Pn=Q2—>  y. 

In  other  words,  if  equals  be  taken  from  equals  the 
remainders  are  equal. 

(v)  The  axiom  that  the  whole  is  greater  than  its 
part  suffers  from  the  difficulty  that  we  have  not  defined 
what  we  mean  by  'greater  than.'  Our  condition  (ii) 
states  that  the  whole  is  unequal  to  its  part.  But  the 
idea  of  'greater  than'  really  follows  from  the  condition 
which  we  wish  to  express.  I  think  that  the  missing 
condition  is  best  stated  thus : 


in]  EQUALITY  47 

,    Let  A  and  B  be  two  stretches  of  which  one  contains 
,he  other,  so  that  either  A  contains  B  or  B  contains  A, 
md  let  H  and  K  be  two  other  stretches  with  the  same 
property  in  regard  to  each  other. 
Also  let 


Then  if  H  contains  K,  it  also  follows  that  A  contains 
B.  The  point  of  this  condition  is  that  we  exclude  the 
crosswise  equality  in  which  A  is  congruent  to  a  part  of 
H  and  H  to  a  part  of  A. 

Then  the  idea  of  any  stretch  P  being  greater  than 
any  stretch  Q  must  be  defined  to  mean  that  there  is  a 
stretch  H  containing  a  part  K  such  that 


Thus  the  verbal  form,  the  whole  is  greater  than  its 
part,  becomes  a  mere  tautology.  The  true  point  being 
first  our  condition  (ii)  that  the  whole  is  unequal  to  any 
of  its  parts,  and  our  condition  (v)  which  excludes  the 
crosswise  equality  of  wholes  to  parts. 

The  theory  of  'numerical  measurement  depends  upon 
three  additional  conditions  which  can  be  conveniently 
preceded  by  some  definitions.  Let  a  sequence  of  n 
successively  adjoined  stretches  AL9  A.2,  ...  ,  An,  which  is 
such  that 

Ap  =  Aq->y,     [p,  2  =  1,2,  ...,?i] 

be  called  a  '  stretch  sequence  for  y.'  Let  each  individual 
stretch  of  the  sequence  be  called  a  'component  stretch' 
of  the  sequence,  and  let  the  stretch  which  is  composed 
of  all  the  stretches  of  the  sequence  be  called  the 
'resultant  stretch'  of  the  sequence. 


48  EQUALITY  [CH 

Furthermore  if  c  be  the  member  of  y  which  charac 
terises  each  component  stretch  of  the  sequence  of  n 
stretches,  let  nc  be  the  symbol  for  the  member  of  y 
which  characterises  the  resultant  stretch  of  the  sequence. 

Also  if  cf  be  an  alternative  symbol  for  nc,  let  -  cf  be  an 

n 

alternative  symbol  for  c. 

The  three  conditions  are  : 

(vi)  If  A  be  any  stretch  and  n  be  any  integer,  then 
a  stretch  sequence  for  y  can  be  found  composed  of  n 
members  such  that  A  is  its  resultant. 

(vii)  If  A  and  B  be  any  two  coterminous  stretches, 
and  A  be  part  of  B,  then  we  can  find  an  integer  n  such 
that  there  exists  a  stretch  sequence  for  y  of  n  terms 
such  that  A  is  its  first  term  and  B  is  part  of  the  re 
sultant  of  the  sequence. 

(viii)  If  A  be  any  stretch  and  n  any  integer,  then  A  is 
a  member  in  any  assigned  ordinal  position  of  two  stretch 
sequences  for  y  of  n  terms,  the  two  sequences  running 
in  opposed  directions. 

The  condition  (vii)  is  the  axiom  of  Archimedes. 

It  is  evident  that  we  may  conceive  y  as  the  class  of 
magnitudes  and  the  stretches  as  the  class  of  concrete 
quantities.  The  difference  between  a  magnitude  and  a 
concrete  quantity  is  the  difference  between  the  length, 
called  a  yard,  and  the  particular  concrete  instance  which 
is  in  the  custody  of  the  Warden  of  the  Standards. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  plunge  further  into  the  exact 
analysis  of  the  theory  of  extensive  quantity.  The  dis 
cussion  has  been  carried  far  enough  to  make  it  evident 
that  the  qualifying  class  y,  which  is  the  class  of  magni 
tudes,  is  simply  a  class  of  qualities  which  happen  to  be 
sorted  out  among  the  qualified  class  (which  in  the  above 
example  was  a  class  of  stretches)  in  such  a  way  that, 


in]  EQUALITY  49 

when  one  member  of  y  has  been  taken  as  the  standard 
of  reference,  the  unit,  all  the  other  members  of  y  can 
be  described  in  terms  of  it  by  means  of  real  numbers. 
But  a  quality  which  belongs  to  the  set  y  is  in  itself  in 
no  way  otherwise  distinguished  from  any  other  quality 
of  things.  Quantity  arises  from  a  distribution  of 
qualities  which  in  a  certain  definite  way  has  regard  to 
the  peculiar  fact  that  in  certain  cases  two  extended 
spatio-temporal  elements  together  form  a  third  such 
element.  In  fact  the  'qualifying'  qualities  are  distri 
buted  among  extended  things  with  a  certain  regard  to 
their  property  of  extension.  Also  it  is  evident  that 
two  stretches  A  and  B  which  are  equal  for  one  quali 
fying  class  y  may  be  unequal  for  another  qualifying 
class  y. 

If  we  apply  this  doctrine  to  the  classical  theory  of 
space  and  time,  we  find,  following  Sophus  Lie's  analysis, 
that  there  are  an  indefinite  number  of  qualifying  classes 
y,  y,  y",  etc.,  which  for  the  case  of  three-dimensional 
space  generate  relations  of  congruence  among  spatial 
elements,  and  that  each  such  set  of  congruence  relations 
is  inconsistent  with  any  other  such  set. 

For  the  case  of  time  the  opposite  trouble  arises.  Tune 
in  itself,  according  to  the  classical  theory,  presents  us 
with  no  qualifying  class  at  all  on  which  a  theory  of 
congruence  can  be  founded. 

This  breakdown  of  the  uniqueness  of  congruence  for 
space  and  of  its  very  existence  for  time  is  to  be  con 
trasted  with  the  fact  that  mankind  does  in  truth  agree 
on  a  congruence  system  for  space  and  on  a  congruence 
system  for  time  which  are  founded  on  the  direct  evidence 
of  its  senses.  We  ask,  why  this  pathetic  trust  in  the  yard- 
measure  and  the  clock?  The  truth  is  that  we  have  observed 
something  which  the  classical  theory  does  not  explain. 

W.  R.  4 


50  EQUALITY  [CH 

It  is  important  to  understand  exactly  where  the  diffi 
culty  lies.  It  is  often  wrongly  conceived  as  depending 
on  the  inexactness  of  all  measurements  in  regard  to  very 
small  quantities.  According  to  our  methods  of  observa 
tion  we  may  be  correct  to  a  hundredth,  or  a  thousandth, 
or  a  millionth  of  an  inch.  But  there  is  always  a  margin 
left  over  within  which  we  cannot  measure.  However 
this  character  of  inexactness  is  not  the  difficulty  in 
question. 

Let  us  suppose  that  our  measurements  can  be  ideally 
exact;  it  will  be  still  the  case  that  if  one  man  uses  one 
qualifying  class  y  and  the  other  man  uses  another 
qualifying  class  S,  and  if  they  both  admit  the  standard 
yard  kept  in  the  exchequer  chambers  to  be  their  unit 
of  measurement,  they  will  disagree  as  to  what  other 
distances  places  should  be  judged  to  be  equal  to  that 
standard  distance  in  the  exchequer  chambers.  Nor  need 
their  disagreement  be  of  a  negligible  character.  For 
example,  the  man  who  uses  the  qualifying  class  y  might 
be  in  agreement  with  the  rest  of  us,  who  are  also  using 
y,  and  the  other  man  who  uses  S  might  also  be  a  well- 
trained  accurate  observer.  But  in  his  measurement  the 
distance  from  York  to  Edinburgh  might  come  out  at 
exactly  one  yard. 

But  no  one,  who  is  not  otherwise  known  to  be  a 
lunatic,  is  apt  to  make  such  a  foolish  mistake. 

The  conclusion  is  that  when  we  cease  to  think  of 
mere  abstract  mathematics  and  proceed  to  measure  in 
the  realm  of  nature,  we  choose  our  qualifying  class  y 
for  some  reason  in  addition  to  the  mere  fact  that  the 
various  characters  included  in  y  are  sorted  among 
stretches  so  as  to  satisfy  the  conditions  for  congruence 
which  I  have  jotted  down  above. 

When  we  say  that  two  stretches  match  in  respect  to 


in]  EQUALITY  51 

length,  what  do  we  mean?  Furthermore  we  have  got 
to  include  time.  When  two  lapses  of  time  match  in 
respect  to  duration,  what  do  we  mean?  We  have  seen 
that  measurement  presupposes  matching,  so  it  is  of  no 
use  to  hope  to  explain  matching  by  measurement. 

We  have  got  to  dismiss  from  our  minds  all  considera 
tions  of  number  and  measurement  and  quantity,  and 
simply  concentrate  attention  on  what  we  mean  by 
matching  in  length. 

It  is  an  entirely  different  and  subsequent  considera 
tion  as  to  whether  length  in  this  sense  of  the  term  is  a 
class  of  qualities  which  is  sorted  out  to  stretches  in 
accordance  with  the  congruence  conditions. 

Our  physical  space  therefore  must  already  have  a 
structure  and  the  matching  must  refer  to  some  qualifying 
class  of  qualities  inherent  in  this  structure.  The  only 
possible  structure  is  that  of  planes  and  straight  lines, 
such  that  stretches  of  straight  lines  can  be  conceived 
as  composed  of  points  arranged  in  order. 

An  additional  factor  of  structure  can  be  that  of 
ordinary  Euclidean  parallelism.  By  this  I  mean  that 
through  any  point  outside  a  plane  there  is  one  and  only 
one  plane  which  does  not  intersect  a  given  plane.  You 
will  observe  that  I  have  had  to  adopt  what  is  termed 
Playfair's  axiom  for  the  definition  of  parallels.  It  is  the 
only  one  which  does  not  introduce  some  presupposition 
of  congruence,  either  of  length  or  angles.  I  draw  your 
attention  to  the  absolute  necessity  of  defining  our 
structure  without  the  presupposition  of  congruence.  If 
we  fail  in  this  respect  our  argument  will  be  involved  in 
a  vicious  circle. 

With  this  definition  of  parallels  it  is  now  very  easy 
to  get  some  way  in  the  explanation  of  what  we  mean 

4-2 


52 


EQUALITY 


[CH 


by  stretches  matching  in  length.  For  since  our  structure 
includes  parallels,  it  also  includes  parallelograms.  Ac 
cordingly  we  can  agree  that  the  opposite  sides  of 
parallelograms  match  in  length.  It  is  then  easy  enough 
to  show  that  we  have  a  complete  system  of  congruence 
for  any  one  system  of  parallel  stretches  in  space.  This 
means  that  if  there  are  any  two  stretches  either  on  the 
same  straight  line  or  on  parallel  straight  lines,  we  have 
a  definitely  determined  numerical  ratio  of  the  length  of 
one  to  the  length  of  the  other. 

But  we  cannot  go  further  and  compare  the  lengths 
of  two  stretches  which  are  not  parallel,  unless  we  in 
troduce  some  additional  principle  for  the  matching  of 
lengths. 

We  can  find  this  additional  principle  provided  that 
we  can  define  a  right-angle  without  any  appeal  to  the 
idea  of  congruence  or  equality.  For  let  us  anticipate 
such  a  definition  independent  of  congruence. 


8  D  C 

Let  D  be  the  midpoint  of  the  stretch  BC,  and  draw 
DA  perpendicular  to  BC.  Then  our  additional  principle 
of  matching  shall  be  that  AB  is  equal  to  AC.  In  this 
way  we  can  compare  the  lengths  of  stretches  which  are 
not  parallel,  and  the  whole  theory  of  congruence  in  space 
is  established. 


in]  EQUALITY  53 

But  as  yet  we  have  not  gone  any  way  towards  finding 
any  theory  for  the  congruence  of  lapses  of  time.  Accord 
ingly  if  we  are  to  explain  how  it  is  that  in  our  observa 
tion  of  nature  we  all  agree  in  our  systems  of  space  and 
time  congruence,  we  have  to  explain  what  we  mean  by 
planes,  and  by  right-angles,  and  how  we  should  match 
lapses  of  time.  We  can  omit  straight  lines  from  this 
catalogue,  since  they  can  be  defined  as  the  intersections 
of  planes.  We  shall  however  have  to  explain  how  the 
points  on  straight  lines  come  to  be  arranged  in  order. 

When  we  are  conscious  of  nature,  what  is  it  that  we 
really  observe?  The  obvious  answer  is  that  we  perceive 
various  material  bodies,  such  as  chairs,  bricks,  trees. 
We  can  touch  them,  see  them  and  hear  them.  As  I 
write  I  can  hear  the  birds  singing  in  a  Berkshire  garden 
in  early  spring. 

In  conformity  with  this  answer,  it  is  now  fashionable 
and  indeed  almost  universal  to  say  that  our  notions  of 
space  merely  arise  from  our  endeavours  to  express  the 
relations  of  these  bodies  to  each  other.  I  am  sorry  to 
appear  pigheaded ;  but,  though  I  am  nearly  in  a  minority 
of  one,  I  believe  this  answer  to  be  entirely  wrong.  I  will 
explain  my  reasons. 

Are  these  material  bodies  really  the  ultimate  data  of 
perception,  incapable  of  further  analysis? 

If  they  are,  I  at  once  surrender.  But  I  submit  that 
plainly  they  have  not  this  ultimate  character.  My  allu 
sion  to  the  birds  singing  was  made  not  because  I  felt 
poetical,  but  to  warn  you  that  we  were  being  led  into 
a  difficulty.  What  I  immediately  heard  was  the  song. 
The  birds  only  enter  perception  as  a  correlation  of  more 
ultimate  immediate  data  of  perception,  among  which 
for  my  consciousness  their  song  is  dominant. 


V 

54  \  \EQUALITY  [CH 

Material  bodies  only  enter  my  consciousness  as  a 
representation  of  a  certain  coherence  of  the  sense-objects 
such  as  colours,  sounds  and  touches.  But  these  sense- 
objects  at  once  proclaim  themselves  to  be  adjectives 
(pseudo-adjectives,  according  to  the  previous  chapter) 
of  events.  It  is  not  mere  red  that  we  see,  but  a  red 
patch  in  a  definite  place  enduring  through  a  definite 
time.  The  red  is  an  adjective  of  the  red  time  and  place. 
Thus  nature  appears  to  us  as  the  continuous  passage  of 
instantaneous  three-dimensional  spatial  spreads,  the 
temporal  passage  adding  a  fourth  dimension.  Thus 
nature  is  stratified  by  time.  In  fact  passage  in  time  is  of 
the  essence  of  nature,  and  a  body  is  merely  the  coherence 
of  adjectives  qualifying  the  same  route  through  the  four- 
dimensional  space-time  of  events. 

But  as  the  result  of  modern  observations  we  have  to 
admit  that  there  are  an  indefinite  number  of  such  modes 
of  time  stratification. 

However,  this  admission  at  once  yields  an  expla 
nation  of  the  meaning  of  the  instantaneous  spatial 
extension  of  nature.  For  it  explains  this  extension  as 
merely  the  exhibition  of  the  different  ways  in  which 
simultaneous  occurrences  function  in  regard  to  other 
time-systems. 

I  mean  that  occurrences  which  are  simultaneous  for 
one  time-system  appear  as  spread  out  in  three  dimen 
sions  because  they  function  diversely  for  other  time- 
systems.  The  extended  space  of  one  time-system 
is  merely  the  expression  of  properties  of  other  time- 
systems. 

According  to  this  doctrine,  a  moment  of  time  is 
nothing  else  than  an  instantaneous  spread  of  nature. 
Thus  let  tlt  t2,  t3  be  three  moments  of  time  according  to 


Ill] 


EQUALITY 


55 


one  time-system,  and  let  Tlt  T2,  T3  be  three  moments 
of  time  according  to  another  time-system.  The  inter 
sections  of  pairs  of  moments  in  diverse  time-systems 
are  planes  in  each  instantaneous  three-dimensional  space. 
In  the  diagram  each  continuous  line  accordingly  sym 
bolises  a  three-dimensional  space;  and  the  intersections 
of  continuous  lines,  such  as  A  or  B  or  (7,  symbolise 


ft  fe 

planes.    Thus  ^  and  Tl  are  each  a  three-dimensional 
space,  and  A  is  a  plane  in  either  space. 

Parallelism  is  the  reflection  into  an  instantaneous 
space  of  one  time-system  of  the  property  of  moments  of 
some  other  system.  Thus  A  and  B  are  parallel  planes 
in  tlt  since  Tl  and  jT2  are  moments  of  the  same  system 
which  is  not  the  system  to  which  ^  belongs. 


56  EQUALITY  [OH 

But  when  we  talk  of  space  we  are  not  usually  thinking 
of  the  instantaneous  fact  of  immediate  perception.  We 
are  thinking  of  an  enduring  scheme  of  extension  within 
which  all  these  instantaneous  facts  are  fitted.  It  follows 
that  we  ought  to  be  able  to  find  a  meaning  for  the  idea 
of  a  permanent  space  in  connection  with  each  time- 
system. 

This  conception  must  arise  from  our  immediate  obser 
vations  of  motion  and  rest.  Both  rest  and  motion  have 
no  meaning  in  connection  with  one  mere  instantaneous 
space.  In  such  a  space  everything  is  where  it  is  and  there 
is  an  instantaneous  end  to  it ;  to  be  succeeded  by  another 
instantaneous  space.  But  motion  and  rest  at  once  warn 
us  that  our  perception  involves  something  more. 

The  instantaneous  moment  is  merely  an  ideal  limit 
of  perception.  Have  you  ever  endeavoured  to  capture 
the  instantaneous  present?  It  eludes  you,  because  in 
truth  there  is  no  such  entity  among  the  crude  facts  of 
our  experience.  Our  present  experience  is  an  enduring 
fact  within  which  we  discriminate  a  passage  of  nature. 
Now  within  this  enduring  fact  we  observe  rest  and 
motion.  A  body  at  rest  in  the  space  of  our  observation 
is  tracing  out  a  certain  historical  route  intersecting  the 
moments  of  our  time-system  in  a  sequence  of  instan 
taneous  points.  This  route  is  what  we  mean  by  a  point 
of  the  permanent  space  of  our  time-system.  Thus  each 
time-system  has  its  own  space  with  its  own  points,  and 
these  permanent  points  are  loci  of  instantaneous  points. 

The  paradoxes  of  relativity  arise  from  the  fact  that 
we  have  not  noticed  that  when  we  change  our  time- 
system  we  change  the  meaning  of  time,  the  meaning  of 
space  and  the  meaning  of  points  of  space  (conceived  as 
permanent). 


in]  EQUALITY  57 

Now  the  route  of  a  small  body  at  rest  in  the  space  of 
a  time-system,  that  is  to  say,  a  point  of  that  time-system, 
has  a  certain  symmetry  in  respect  to  the  successive  in 
stantaneous  spaces  of  that  system,  which  is  expressed  for 
us  by  the  perception  of  lack  of  change  of  position.  This 
symmetry  is  the  basis  of  the  definition  of  rectangularity. 

If  the  body  be  at  rest  in  the  space  of  the  time-system 
t,  it  is  moving  in  a  straight  line  in  the  space  of  another 
time-system  T.  This  permanent  straight  line  intersects 
any  moment  of  T,  say  T19  in  an  instantaneous  straight 
line  ^  (say).  Then  />  is  perpendicular  to  the  series  of 
instantaneous  parallel  planes  in  which  the  moments  of 
system  t  intersect  T^.  In  other  words  the  planes  to 
which  motion  is  perpendicular  are  the  planes  of  inter 
section  with  the  moments  of  that  time-system  for  whose 
space  that  motion  would  be  represented  as  rest. 

We  have  thus  defined  both  parallelism  and  perpen 
dicularity  without  reference  to  congruence,  but  in  terms 
of  immediate  data  of  perception.  Furthermore,  the 
parallelism  of  the  moments  of  one  time-system  enables 
us  to  extend  parallelism  to  time  as  also  expressing  the 
relation  to  each  other  of  permanent  points  of  the  same 
time-system.  It  thus  follows  that  we  now  possess  a 
structure  in  terms  of  which  congruence  can  be  defined. 
This  means  that  there  will  be  a  class  of  qualities  y  one 
and  only  one  of  which  attaches  to  any  stretch  on  a 
straight  line  or  on  a  point,  such  that  matching  in  respect 
to  this  quality  is  what  we  mean  by  congruence. 

The  thesis  that  I  have  been  maintaining  is  that 
measurement  presupposes  a  perception  of  matching  in 
quality.  Accordingly  in  examining  the  meaning  of  any 
particular  kind  of  measurement  we  have  to  ask,  What 
is  the  quality  that  matches? 


58  EQUALITY  [CH 

Furthermore,  in  applying  this  doctrine  to  measure 
ments  in  space  and  time,  I  have  maintained  that  the 
things  whose  qualities  match  are  events.  In  other  words, 
I  maintained  that  it  is  events  that  are  congruent,  and 
that  spatial  congruence  and  temporal  congruence  are 
merely  special  instances  of  this  fundamental  congruence. 
In  conformity  with  this  doctrine  I  also  maintain  that  space 
and  time  are  merely  the  exhibition  of  relations  between 
events. 

The  usual  opinion,  or  at  any  rate  the  more  usual  mode 
of  expression,  is  that  space  and  time  are  relations  between 
the  material  objects  implicated  in  events.  It  is  difficult 
to  understand  how  time  can  be  a  relation  between  two 
permanent  objects.  Also  with  the  modern  assimilation 
of  time  and  space,  this  difficulty  in  respect  to  time  also 
attaches  to  space.  Furthermore,  I  hold  that  these  per 
manent  objects  are  nothing  else  than  adjectives  of 
events.  It  follows  that  a  yard  measure  is  merely  a 
device  for  making  evident  the  spatial  congruence  of  the 
events  in  which  it  is  implicated. 

The  divergence  between  the  two  points  of  view  as  to 
space-time,  that  is  to  say,  as  to  whether  it  exhibits  re 
lations  between  events  or  relations  between  objects  in 
events  is  really  of  the  utmost  importance  in  the  stage 
of  physical  science.  If  it  be  a  relatedness  between  events, 
it  has  the  character  of  a  systematic  uniform  relatedness 
between  events  which  is  independent  of  the  contingent 
adjectives  of  events.  In  this  case  we  must  reject  Ein 
stein's  view  of  a  heterogeneity  in  space-time.  But  if 
space-time  be  a  relatedness  between  objects,  it  shares 
in  the  contingency  of  objects,  and  may  be  expected  to 
acquire  a  heterogeneity  from  the  contingent  character 
of  objects.  I  cannot  understand  what  meaning  can  be 


in]  EQUALITY  59 

assigned  to  the  distance  of  the  sun  from  Sirius  if  the  very 
nature  of  space  depends  upon  casual  intervening  objects 
which  we  know  nothing  about.  Unless  we  start  with 
some  knowledge  of  a  systematically  related  structure 
of  space-time  we  are  dependent  upon  the  contingent 
relations  of  bodies  which  we  have  not  examined  and 
cannot  prejudge. 

Furthermore,  how  time  is  to  be  got  from  the  relations 
of  permanent  bodies  completely  puzzles  me.  And  yet 
the  moderns  assimilate  time  with  space.  I  have  never 
seen  even  the  beginning  of  an  explanation  of  the  meaning 
of  the  usual  phraseology. 

I  have  already  reiterated,  that  measurement  presup 
poses  a  structure  yielding  definite  stretches  which, 
in  some  sense  inherent  in  the  structure,  match  each 
other;  and  I  have  explained  the  type  of  structure  which 
is  formed  by  our  space-time. 

The  essence  of  this  structure  is  that  it  is  stratified 
in  many  different  ways  by  different  time-systems.  This 
is  a  very  peculiar  idea  which  is  the  product  of  the 
speculations  of  the  last  fifteen  years  or  so.  We  owe  the 
whole  conception  notably  to  Einstein.  I  do  not  agree 
with  his  way  of  handling  his  discovery.  But  I  have  no 
doubt  as  to  its  general  correctness.  It  is  at  first  sight 
somewhat  of  a  shock  to  think  that  other  beings  may 
slice  nature  into  time-sections  in  a  different  way  to 
what  we  do.  In  fact  we  have  differences  even  among 
ourselves  which  luckily  are  quite  imperceptible.  How 
ever  if  we  allow  this  possibility  we  not  only  explain 
many  modern  delicate  experiments,  but  we  also  obtain 
explanations  of  what  we  mean  by  the  spatial  extension 
in  three  dimensions,  and  by  planes  and  straight  lines, 
and  parallels  and  right-angles.  We  also  obtain  a  definite 


60  EQUALITY  [CH  m 

meaning  for  the  matching  which  is  the  basis  of  our  con 
gruence.  The  explanation  is  too  sweeping  to  be  put  aside. 
Our  whole  geometry  is  merely  the  expression  of  the 
ways  in  which  different  events  are  implicated  in  different 
time-systems. 

I  have  also  hitherto  omitted  to  point  out  that  all 
order  in  space  is  merely  the  expression  of  order  in  time. 
For  a  series  of  parallel  planes  in  the  space  of  our  time  is 
merely  the  series  of  intersections  with  a  series  of  moments 
of  another  time-system.  Thus  the  order  of  the  parallel 
planes  is  merely  the  time-order  of  the  moments  of  this 
other  system. 

I  must  stop  now.  We  started  from  the  simplest  idea 
which  meets  every  child  at  the  beginning  of  his  or  her 
schooldays.  I  mean  the  idea  of  equality. 

We  asked  what  it  meant.  We  have  then  been  led  on 
and  on,  till  we  have  found  ourselves  plunged  in  the 
abstruse  modern  speculations  concerning  the  character  of 
the  Universe.  They  are  not  really  very  difficult.  I  call 
them  abstruse  because  they  deal  with  questions  which 
we  do  not  ordinarily  think  about.  It  is  therefore  a  strain 
on  our  imaginations  to  follow  the  line  of  thought.  But 
when  we  have  once  allowed  the  possibility  of  different 
meanings  for  time  in  nature,  the  argument  is  a  straight 
forward  deduction  of  the  consequences. 


CHAPTER  TV 

SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE 

IT  is  my  ambition  in  this  lecture  to  discuss  some  general 
principles  of  mathematical  physics,  and  to  illustrate 
them  by  their  application  to  the  problem  of  the  gravi 
tational  field.  In  a  sense  such  a  discussion  should  form 
the  first  chapter  of  the  science,  but  it  is  that  first  chapter 
which  is  studied  last. 

The  Apparent  World.  It  would  be  easy  to  quote  an 
imposing  array  of  authorities,  almost  a  consensus  of 
authorities,  in  support  of  the  thesis  that  the  subject 
matter  of  physical  science  is  composed  of  things  observed 
by  the  senses.  Such  things  are  sights,  sounds,  touches, 
bodily  feelings,  shapes,  distances,  and  their  mutual  rela 
tions.  I  will  call  the  whole  assemblage  of  them  the 
'apparent  world.'  Natural  science  is  therefore  the  study 
of  the  interconnections  of  the  things  forming  the  ap 
parent  world. 

This  profession  of  the  motive  of  science  seems  however 
in  sharp  contradiction  to  its  actual  achievement.  The 
molecular  theory,  the  wave  theory  of  light,  and  finally 
the  electromagnetic  theory  of  things  in  general  have,  as 
it  seems,  set  up  for  scientific  investigation  a  society  of 
entities,  such  as  ether,  molecules,  and  electrons,  which 
are  intrinsically  incapable  of  direct  observation.  When 
Sir  Ernest  Rutherford  at  Cambridge  knocks  a  molecule 
to  pieces,  he  does  not  see  a  molecule  or  an  electron. 
What  he  observes  is  a  flash  of  light.  There  is  at  most 
a  parallelism  between  his  observation  and  the  conjectural 
molecular  catastrophe. 


62      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [OH 

I  suggest  to  you  that,  unless  we  are  careful  in  our 
formulation  of  principles,  the  outcome  of  this  train  of 
thought  is  apt  to  be  unsatisfactory  and  very  misleading 
to  scientific  imagination.  The  apparent  world  becomes 
an  individual  psychological  reaction  to  the  stimulus  of 
an  entirely  disparate  interplay  of  electrons  and  ether. 
The  whole  of  it  is  in  the  same  boat.  There  is  no  prin 
ciple  by  which  we  can  assign  for  some  of  it  any  indepen 
dence  of  individual  psychology  superior  to  that  of  the 
remainder. 

On  this  theory  we  must  entirely  separate  psychological 
time,  space,  external  perceptions,  and  bodily  feelings 
from  the  scientific  world  of  molecular  interaction.  This 
strange  world  of  science  dwells  apart  like  the  gods  of 
Epicurus,  except  that  it  has  the  peculiar  property  of 
inducing  our  minds  to  play  upon  us  the  familiar  antics 
of  our  senses. 

If  we  are  to  avoid  this  unfortunate  bifurcation,  we 
must  construe  our  knowledge  of  the  apparent  world  as 
being  an  individual  experience  of  something  which  is 
more  than  personal.  Nature  is  thus  a  totality  including 
individual  experiences,  so  that  we  must  reject  the  dis 
tinction  between  nature  as  it  really  is  and  experiences 
of  it  which  are  purely  psychological.  Our  experiences 
of  the  apparent  world  are  nature  itself. 

Two-fold  Cognisance.  We  have  a  two-fold  cognisance 
of  nature,  and  I  will  name  the  two  factors  of  this  ex 
perience  'cognisance  by  adjective'  and  'cognisance  by 
relatedness.' 

Think  of  yourself  as  saying,  'There  is  a  red  patch.' 
You  are  affirming  redness  of  something,  and  you  are 
primarily  conscious  of  that  something  because  of  its 
redness.  In  other  words,  the  redness  exhibits  to  you  the 


iv]      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       63 

something  which  is  red.  This  is  cognisance  by  adjective, 
red  being  the  adjective.  But  your  experience  has  gone 
further  than  mere  cognisance  by  adjective.  Your  know 
ledge  is  not  merely  of  something  which  is  red.  The 
patch  is  there  and  it  endures  while  you  are  observing  it. 
Thus  you  are  cognisant  of  it  as  having  spatio-temporal 
position,  and  by  this  we  mean  a  certain  type  of  related- 
ness  to  the  rest  of  nature  which  is  thereby  involved  in 
our  particular  experience.  This  knowledge  of  nature 
arising  from  its  interconnectedness  by  spatio-temporal 
relations  is  cognisance  by  relatedness. 

For  example,  the  physiological  account  of  the  function 
of  the  brain  as  determining  the  conditions  of  external 
perception  presupposes  that  the  events  of  the  brain 
signify  the  totality  of  contemporaneous  space.  Again 
the  disclosure  of  space  behind  the  looking-glass  as 
qualified  by  images  situated  in  it  exhibits  the  fact  that 
the  events  in  front  of  the  glass  are  significant  of  con 
temporaneous  space  behind  it.  Also  we  know  that  there 
is  space  inside  the  closed  cupboard. 

Nature  is  an  abstraction  from  something  more  con 
crete  than  itself  which  must  also  include  imagination, 
thought,  and  emotion.  This  abstraction  is  characterised 
by  the  systematic  coherency  of  its  interconnections 
disclosed  in  cognisance  by  relatedness.  Thus  the  sub 
stances  of  nature  which  have  the  cognised  adjectives  as 
their  qualities  are  also  the  things  in  nature  connected 
by  the  cognised  relatedness.  Nature  is  delimited  as  the 
field  of  this  closed  system  of  related  things.  Accordingly 
the  ultimate  facts  of  nature  are  events,  and  the  essence 
of  cognisance  by  relatedness  is  the  ability  to  specify  the 
event  by  time  and  by  place.  Dreams  are  ruled  out  by 
their  inability  to  pass  this  test. 


64      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE      [CH 

But  an  event  can  be  specified  in  this  way  without  its 
being  the  subject  of  direct  cognisance  by  adjective.  For 
example  we  can  exactly  specify  a  time  and  a  place  on 
the  further  surface  of  the  moon,  but  we  should  very  much 
like  to  know  what  is  happening  there.  There  is  however 
a  certain  fullness  in  the  dual  cognisance  both  by  adjec 
tive  and  by  relatedness.  I  will  use  the  term  'perception' 
for  this  full  experience. 

Mere  cognisance  by  relatedness  is  essentially  know 
ledge  of  an  event  merely  by  its  spatio-temporal  relations 
to  other  events  which  are  perceived  and  thus  form  a 
framework  of  what  is  fully  experienced.  In  this  sense 
there  is  no  cognisance  by  relatedness  without  perception. 

It  is  not  the  case  that  the  analysis  of  the  adjectives 
of  appearance  attached  to  the  events  within  any  limited 
field  of  nature  carries  with  it  any  certain  knowledge  of 
adjectives  attached  to  other  events  in  the  rest  of  nature, 
or  indeed  of  other  such  adjectives  attached  to  those 
same  events.  I  will  refer  to  this  fact  by  the  phrase,  the 
contingency  of  appearance. 

On  the  other  hand,  though  the  character  of  time  and 
space  is  not  in  any  sense  a  priori,  the  essential  related- 
ness  of  any  perceived  field  of  events  to  all  other  events 
requires  that  this  relatedness  of  all  events  should  con 
form  to  the  ascertained  disclosure  derived  from  the 
limited  field.  For  we  can  only  know  that  distant  events 
are  spatio- temporally  connected  with  the  events  imme 
diately  perceived  by  knowing  what  these  relations  are. 
In  other  words,  these  relations  must  possess  a  systematic 
uniformity  in  order  that  we  may  know  of  nature  as 
extending  beyond  isolated  cases  subjected  to  the  direct 
examination  of  individual  perception.  I  will  refer  to 
this  fact  by  the  phrase,  the  uniform  significance  of  events. 


iv]      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       65 

Thus  the  constitutive  character  of  nature  is  expressed 
by  'the  contingency  of  appearance'  and  'the  uniform 
significance  of  events.'  These  laws  express  characters  of 
nature  disclosed  respectively  in  cognisance  by  adjective 
and  cognisance  by  relatedness.  This  doctrine  leads  to 
the  rejection  of  Einstein's  interpretation  of  his  formulae, 
as  expressing  a  casual  heterogeneity  of  spatio-temporal 
warping,  dependent  upon  contingent  adjectives. 
~The  case  of  the  yard-measure  illustrates  my  meaning. 
It  is  a  contingent  adjective  of  the  events  where  it  is 
situated.  Its  spatio-temporal  properties  are  entirely 
derived  from  the  events  which  it  qualifies.  For  example, 
its  use  depends  on  the  recognition  of  simultaneity,  so 
that  we  shall  not  observe  its  two  ends  at  widely  different 
times.  But  simultaneity  concerns  events.  Also  the 
mere  self-identity  of  the  yard-measure  does  not  suffice 
for  its  use,  since  we  also  admit  the  continued  identity 
of  objects  which  shrink  or  expand.  The  yard-measure 
is  merely  a  device  for  making  evident  obscure  relations 
between  those  events  in  which  it  appears. 

If  congruence  merely  meant  relations  between  con 
tingent  adjectives  of  appearance,  there  would  be  no 
measurement  of  spatial  distance  or  of  temporal  lapse 
without  knowledge  of  actual  intervening  appearances, 
and  no  meaning  for  such  distance  in  the  absence  of  these 
adjectives.  For  example,  the  '  distance  of  the  star  Sirius ' 
would  be  a  phrase  without  meaning. 

You  will  have  observed  that  in  this  doctrine  of  cog 
nisance  by  relatedness  I  am  merely  taking  the  old  belief 
that  we  know  of  unbounded  time  and  of  unbounded 
space  and  am  adapting  it  to  my  inversion  which  gives 
the  supremacy  to  events  and  reduces  time  and  space  to 
mere  relations  between  them. 

W.  R.  5 


66      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

The  Doctrine  of  Time.  It  follows  from  my  refusal  to 
bifurcate  nature  into  individual  experience  and  external 
cause  that  we  must  reject  the  distinction  between 
psychological  time  which  is  personal  and  impersonal 
time  as  it  is  in  nature.  Two  conclusions  follow,  of  which 
the  one  is  conservative,  and  indeed  almost  reactionary, 
and  the  other  is  paradoxical. 

The  conservative  conclusion  is  that  in  cognisance  by 
relatedness  the  apparent  world  is  disclosed  as  stratified 
into  a  succession  of  strata  which  are  subordinate  totali 
ties  of  immediate  experience.  Each  short  duration  of 
time  is  merely  a  total  slab  of  nature  disclosed  as  a  totality 
in  cognisance  by  relatedness,  and  for  any  individual  ex 
perience  partially  disclosed  in  cognisance  by  adjective. 
There  can  be  no  other  meaning  for  time,  if  we  admit 
the  position  from  which  my  argument  has  started.  I  will 
state  the  doctrine  in  this  way,  Time  is  a  stratification 
of  nature.  Adherence  to  this  doctrine  is  today  the  mark 
of  a  reactionary.  I  accept  the  term  with  the  qualifi 
cation  that  it  is  reaction  to  the  admission  of  obvious 
fact. 

We  now  pass  to  the  other  conclusion  which  is  para 
doxical.  The  assumption  of  the  uniqueness  of  the  tem 
poral  stratification  of  nature  has  slipped  into  human 
thought.  Certainly  in  each  individual  experience  such 
uniqueness  must  be  granted.  But  confessedly  each 
individual  experience  is  partial,  and  we  cannot  safely 
reason  from  partial  experience  to  the  limitation  of  the 
variety  of  nature.  Accordingly  the  uniqueness  of  time 
succession  for  each  of  us  does  not  guarantee  its  consis 
tency  for  all. 

At  this  point  I  put  by  urgent  metaphysical  questions 
concerning  any  supposed  distinction  between  past, 


iv]      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       67 

present,  and  future  as  to  the  character  of  their  existence. 
Also  I  need  not  recall  to  your  minds  the  reasons,  based 
upon  refined  observations,  for  assuming  the  existence  in 
nature  of  alternative  time-systems  entailing  alternative 
systems  of  stratification. 

I  think  that  no  one  can  study  the  evidence  in  its 
detail  without  becoming  convinced  that  we  are  in  the 
presence  of  one  of  the  most  profound  reorganisations  of 
scientific  and  philosophic  thought.  But  so  many  con 
siderations  are  raised,  so  diverse  in  character,  that  we 
are  not  justified  in  accepting  blindfold  the  formulation 
of  principles  which  guided  Einstein  to  his  formulae. 

You  will  have  observed  that  for  reasons  which  I  have 
briefly  indicated,  I  maintain  the  old-fashioned  belief  in 
the  fundamental  character  of  simultaneity.  But  I  adapt 
it  to  the  novel  outlook  by  the  qualification  that  the 
meaning  of  simultaneity  may  be  different  in  different 
individual  experiences.  Furthermore,  since  I  start  from 
the  principle  that  what  is  apparent  in  individual  ex 
perience  is  a  fact  of  nature,  it  follows  that  there  are  in 
nature  alternative  systems  of  stratification  involving 
different  meanings  for  time  and  different  meanings  for 
space.  Accordingly  two  events  which  may  be  simul 
taneous  in  one  instantaneous  space  for  one  mode  of  strati 
fication  may  not  be  simultaneous  in  an  alternative  mode. 

Time  and  Space.  The  homogeneity  of  time  with  space 
arises  from  their  common  share  in  the  more  fundamental 
quality  of  extension  which  is  a  quality  belonging  exclu 
sively  to  events.  By  extension  I  mean  that  quality  in 
virtue  of  which  one  event  may  be  part  of  another  or  two 
events  may  have  a  common  part.  Nature  is  a  continuum 
of  events  so  that  any  two  events  are  both  parts  of  some 
larger  event. 

5—2 


68      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

The  heterogeneity  of  time  from  space  arises  from  the 
difference  in  the  character  of  passage  in  time  from  that 
of  passage  in  space.  Passage  is  the  same  as  significance, 
and  by  significance  I  mean  that  quality  of  an  event 
which  arises  from  its  spatio-temporal  relationships  to 
other  events. 

For  the  sake  of  simplicity  I  will  speak  of  events  whose 
dimensions  are  ideally  restricted.  I  will  call  them 
*  event-particles.'  Also  we  may  conceive  of  an  event 
restricted  except  in  one  dimension.  Such  an  event  may 
be  termed  a  route  or  path,  where  I  am  now  thinking  of 
a  route  of  transition  through  the  continuum  of  nature. 
A  route  may  evidently  be  also  conceived  as  a  linear 
chain  of  event -particles.  But  its  essential  unity  is 
thereby  lost.  A  'spatial'  route  is  a  route  which  lies 
entirely  in  one  instantaneous  space.  A  '  historical '  route 
is  such  that  no  two  of  its  event -particles  are  simultaneous 
according  to  any  time-system.  Along  such  a  route  there 
is  a  definite  antecedence  and  subsequence  in  time  which 
is  independent  of  alternative  time-systems. 

Thus  the  distinction  of  time  from  space,  which  I  have 
just  asserted,  consists  in  the  fact  that  passage  along  a 
spatial  route  has  a  different  character  from  passage  along 
a  historical  route.  For  proof  of  this  fact  think  of  a  spatial 
route  which  has  a  material  particle  situated  in  each  of 
its  event-particles.  We  pronounce  at  once  that  all  these 
material  particles  are  different,  because  no  material 
particle  can  be  in  two  places  at  the  same  time.  But  if 
a  historical  route  is  in  like  case  and  the  material  particles 
be  of  like  character  even  with  some  differences,  we 
equally  pronounce  them  to  be  the  same  material  particle 
at  successive  stages  of  its  existence.  This  difference  of 
judgment  can  only  arise  from  the  distinction  in  the 
characters  of  spatial  and  temporal  passage. 


iv]      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       69 

It  only  strengthens  this  argument  when  we  remember 
that  the  events  are  the  ultimate  substance  of  nature 
and  that  the  apparent  material  particle  is  an  adjective 
of  appearance  which  qualifies  them.  For  the  unique 
type  of  individuality  possessed  by  the  emergence  of  the 
same  adjective  throughout  the  historical  route  must 
be  due  to  the  special  peculiarity  of  the  route.  I  will 
recur  to  this  question  later  when  I  define  adjectival 
particles. 

Time-Systems.  According  to  the  view  which  I  am 
urging  on  you  a  moment  of  time  is  to  be  identified  with 
an  instantaneous  spread  of  the  apparent  world.  The 
relations  of  interconnection  within  this  moment  form  a 
momentary  three-dimensional  space.  Such  a  space  is  an 
abstraction  from  the  full-bloodedness  of  a  moment  of 
time  which  includes  all  that  is  apparent  in  that  space.  A 
time-system  is  a  sequence  of  non-intersecting  moments 
including  all  nature  forwards  and  backwards.  I  call  the 
moments  of  such  a  consistent  system  *  parallel/  because 
all  parallelism  is  derived  from  their  mutual  relations 
and  from  their  intersections  with  the  parallel  moments 
of  other  time-systems. 

I  am  also  assuming  on  rather  slight  evidence  that 
moments  of  different  time-systems  always  intersect. 
This  hypothesis  is  the  simplest  and  I  know  of  no  pheno 
mena  that  would  be  explained  by  its  denial.  The  result 
is  to  introduce  the  peculiar  properties  of  Euclidean 
parallelism. 

One  advantage  of  the  admission  of  alternative  time- 
systems  is  that  they  afford  explanations  of  the  notion 
of  position  and  of  the  notion  of  evenly  lying  loci,  such 
as  planes  and  straight  lines.  However,  I  will  not  in 
this  lecture  enter  into  a  detailed  examination  of  the 
origins  of  geometry. 


70       SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

Permanent  Space.  The  momentary  spaces  of  a  time- 
system  are  matters  of  direct  observation,  at  least  when 
we  construe  momentary  in  an  approximate  sense.  They 
must  be  discriminated  from  the  permanent  space  of  that 
time- system. 

Best  and  motion  are  ultimate  data  of  observation,  and 
permanent  space  is  the  way  of  expressing  the  connec 
tions  of  these  data.  The  ultimate  elements  of  perman 
ent  space  are  therefore  somewhat  elaborate.  It  will  be 
sufficient  for  my  immediate  purpose  in  this  lecture  to 
exhibit  the  meaning  to  be  ascribed  to  a  point  of  the 
permanent  space  of  a  time-system. 

Consider  observations  wedded  to  a  single  .temporal 
mode  of  stratification.  Some  apparent  bodies  will  be 
observed  to  be  in  motion  and  others  at  rest.  The  his 
torical  route  forming  the  successive  situations  of  an 
apparent  particle  at  rest  for  such  an  observer  is  a  point 
in  the  permanent  space  which  corresponds  to  that  time- 
system.  For  an  observer  who  is  wedded  to  another 
time-system  the  same  apparent  particle  will  be  moving 
with  uniform  velocity.  Accordingly  the  point  of  the 
space  of  the  former  time-system  cannot  be  a  point  of  the 
space  of  the  latter  time-system,  since  to  be  at  rest 
occupying  one  point  in  the  space  of  one  time-system  is 
to  be  moving  through  a  succession  of  points  in  the  space 
of  another  time-system.  A  permanent  point  is  thus 
highly  complex  and  only  serves  for  one  particular 
specification  of  the  meaning  of  space  and  time.  Each 
event-particle  will  occur  at  one  point  in  each  permanent 
space,  and  is  thus  the  vertex  of  a  pencil  of  points,  one 
point  for  each  time-system. 

Each  point  intersects  any  moment,  of  whatever  time- 
system,  in  just  one  event-particle.     There  is  thus  a 


iv]      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       71 

point- wise  correlation  between  the  event-particles  of  any 
momentary  space  and  the  points  of  the  permanent  space 
of  any  time-system.  This  correlation  explains  the  na 
turalness  with  which  observation  of  momentary  spaces 
is  expressed  in  terms  of  permanent  space  so  as  to  gain 
the  facile  representation  of  the  phenomena  of  rest  and 
motion,  which  can  have  no  existence  for  a  single  momen 
tary  space. 

This  general  theory  of  the  grounds  in  nature  for 
geometry  and  time  is  consistent  with  a  rigid  relativity 
whereby  space  and  time  are  simply  expressions  for  a 
certain  observed  ordering  of  events.  Also  it  is  essential 
to  note  that  the  spatial  relations  between  apparent 
bodies  only  arise  mediately  through  their  implication 
in  events.  It  is  essential  to  adopt  this  view  if  we  are 
to  admit  any  assimilation  of  space  and  time. 

The  Physical  Field.  We  now  pass  to  the  considera 
tion  of  the  status  of  the  physical  field  of  natural  science. 
The  scope  of  the  contingency  of  appearance  is  limited, 
and  the  conditions  of  limitation  are  what  we  term  the 
laws  of  nature. 

They  are  expressed  by  assuming  that  the  apparent 
adjectives  of  the  past  indicate  a  certain  distribution  of 
character  throughout  events  extending  from  the  past 
into  the  future.  It  is  further  assumed  that  this  hypo 
thetical  distribution  of  character  in  its  turn  expresses 
the  possibilities  of  adjectives  of  appearance  attachable 
to  the  future  events.  Thus  the  regulation  of  future  ad 
jectives  of  appearance  by  past  adjectives  of  appearance 
is  expressed  by  this  intermediate  distribution  of  cha 
racter,  indicated  by  the  past  and  indicating  the  future. 

I  call  this  intermediate  distribution  of  character  the 
'physical  field.'  The  true  expression  of  the  physical 


72       SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [OH 

field  is  always  to  some  extent  a  matter  of  conjecture. 
The  only  guarantee  for  correctness  is  the  pragmatic  test 
that  the  theory  works. 

The  physical  field  is  not  the  cause  of  perception  nor 
is  it  the  object  perceived.  The  search  for  a  cause  of 
perception  raises  a  problem  which  is  probably  meaning 
less  and  certainly  insoluble.  The  physical  field  is  merely 
that  character  of  nature  which  expresses  the  relatedness 
between  the  apparent  adjectives  of  the  past  and  the 
apparent  adjectives  of  the  future.  It  therefore  shares 
in  the  contingency  of  appearance,  and  accordingly  can 
not  affect  spatio-temporal  relations. 

Atomicity.  Luckily  the  physical  field  is  atomic,  so  far 
as  concerns  our  approximate  measurements.  By  this 
I  mean  that  we  can  discriminate  in  the  four-dimensional 
continuum  certain  regions  or  events,  such  that  each 
exhibits  a  physical  character  which  is  entirely  indepen 
dent  of  the  physical  characters  of  other  events  or  of  the 
other  physical  characters  of  that  event.  This  physical 
character  requires  the  whole  region  for  its  complete 
exposition.  Thus  atomicity  implies  two  properties,  one 
is  the  breakdown  of  relativity  in  that  the  atomic 
character  is  independent  of  the  physical  characters  per 
vading  the  rest  of  nature,  and  the  other  is  that  we 
cannot  completely  exhibit  this  character  without  the 
whole  corresponding  region. 

This  physical  atomic  character  is  the  only  case  in 
which  the  Aristotelian  idea  of  an  attribute  of  a  sub 
stance  holds  without  grave  qualification,  at  least  so  far 
as  the  realm  of  nature  is  concerned.  Furthermore, 
atomicity  is  a  property  which  is  capable  of  more  or 
less  complete  realisation.  Failure  to  attain  complete 
atomicity  is  illustrated  when  one  aspect  of  the  physical 


iv]      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE      73 

field  modifies  another  aspect  of  it,  for  example,  when 
the  physical  field  of  mass  modifies  that  of  electro- 
magnetism. 

Observe  that  the  practical  atomicity  of  the  physical 
and  apparent  characters  is  essential  for  the  intelligibility 
of  the  apparent  world  to  a  finite  mind  with  only  partial 
perception.  Without  atomicity  we  could  not  isolate  our 
problems;  every  statement  would  require  a  detailed 
expression  of  all  the  facts  of  nature.  It  has  always  been 
a  reproach  to  those  philosophers  who  emphasize  the 
systematic  relatedness  of  reality  that  they  make  truth 
impossible  for  us  by  requiring  a  knowledge  of  all  as  a 
condition  for  a  knowledge  of  any.  In  the  account  of 
nature  which  I  have  just  given  you  this  objection  is  met 
in  two  ways:  In  so  far  as  nature  is  systematically 
related,  it  is  a  system  of  uniform  relatedness;  and  in 
the  second  place,  intelligibility  is  preserved  amid  the 
contingency  of  appearance  by  the  breakdown  of  related- 
ness  which  is  involved  in  atomicity. 

This  breakdown  of  relatedness  in  the  expression  of 
the  laws  of  nature  is  reflected  into  observation  by  our 
perception  of  material  objects.  Such  an  object  is  more 
than  its  colour,  is  more  than  its  touch,  and  is  more  than 
our  feeling  of  its  resistance  to  push.  The  object,  taken 
throughout  its  history,  is  a  permanent  factor  conditioning 
adjectives  of  appearance,  and  it  is  a  factor  which  is 
largely  independent  of  its  relatedness  to  other  contingent 
facts.  It  is  the  endeavour  to  make  precise  this  aspect 
of  a  perceived  material  object  which  has  led  to  the 
atomicity  of  modern  science. 

Thus  it  is  not  true  to  say,  without  qualification,  that 
the  physical  field  is  not  perceived.  We  do  recognise 
permanences  in  the  relatedness  of  things  sensed,  per- 


74      SOME  PKINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

manences  which  are  largely  disconnected.  The  physical 
field  is  the  endeavour  to  express  precisely  these  per 
ceived  permanences  as  atomic  characters  of  events. 

Adjectival  Particles.  The  discussion  of  these  recog 
nised  permanences  is  reduced  to  an  ideal  simplicity  by 
the  introduction  of  adjectival  particles,  by  which  I  mean 
the  ideally  small  perceived  bodies  and  the  elementary 
physical  particles. 

I  have  already  stated  that  an  adjectival  particle 
receives  its  enduring  individuality  from  the  individuality 
of  its  historical  route.  Let  me  now  give  a  more  precise 
statement  of  my  meaning :  An  'adjectival  particle'  is  the 
adjective  attached  to  the  separate  event-particles  of  a 
historical  route  by  virtue  of  the  fact  that  some  one  and 
the  same  adjective  attaches  to  every  stretch  of  the  route. 
It  is  the  outcome  of  the  transference  to  the  individual 
event-particles  of  a  common  property  of  all  the  stretches. 

Accordingly  the  unique  individuality  of  the  particle 
is  nothing  else  than  the  fusion  of  the  continued  sameness 
of  the  adjective  with  the  concrete  individuality  of  the 
historical  route.  We  must  not  think  of  an  adjectival 
particle  as  moving  through  its  route.  We  will  say  that 
it  ' pervades'  its  route,  and  that  it  is  'situated'  at  each 
event -particle  of  the  route,  and  that  it  'moves'  in  an 
orbit  in  each  permanent  space. 

It  follows  from  this  conception  of  the  meaning  of  an 
adjectival  particle  that  the  expression  of  its  properties 
should  require  the  consideration  of  stretches  of  its  route. 
In  order,  even  now,  to  attain  ideal  simplicity  we  proceed 
to  the  limit  of  making  all  such  stretches  infinitesimally 
small.  A  stretch  of  a  historical  route,  as  thus  employed 
in  the  process  of  proceeding  to  a  limit,  will  be  called  a 
'kinematic  element.'  A  kinematic  element  is  equivalent 


iv]      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       75 

to  both  the  position  and  the  velocity  of  an  adjectival 
particle  in  any  permanent  space  at  any  time. 

Mass -Particles.  A  mass-particle  is  an  adjectival  par 
ticle.  It  follows  that  for  some  limited  purposes  we  can 
treat  it  as  being  situated  in  an  event-particle,  but  that 
for  the  final  purpose  of  enunciating  the  laws  of  nature 
we  must  conceive  it  as  pervading  a  stretch  of  its  his 
torical  route. 

Consider  [cf.  figure,  p.  31]  first  the  former  conception 
of  a  mass-particle  m  as  situated  at  an  event-particle 
which  we  will  call  P.  The  physical  field  due  to  m  at  P 
has  to  stretch  away  into  the  future.  It  is  to  be  a  limited 
atomic  field  with  a  foot  in  two  camps,  for  it  represents 
the  property  of  the  future  as  embodied  in  the  past.  It 
may  therefore,  so  far  as  it  is  completely  atomic,  be  ex 
pected  to  consist  of  that  region  within  the  future  from  P 
which  has  peculiar  affinities  with  the  region  co-present 
•with  P. 

Now  what  I  call  the  kinematic  future  from  P  is  the 
region  traversed  by  the  pencil  of  permanent  points 
which  has  P  as  vertex,  considering  only  the  portions  of 
those  points  which  stream  into  the  future  from  P.  It 
will  be  remembered  that  there  is  one  such  point  for 
each  time-system.  Again  the  region  co-present  with  P 
is  the  region  reached  by  the  moments  containing  P.  It 
will  be  remembered  that  each  moment  is  an  instan 
taneous  three-dimensional  space,  and  that  there  is  one 
such  moment  for  each  time-system.  Both  these  regions, 
the  kinematic  future  from  P  and  the  region  co-present 
with  P,  are  four-dimensional.  The  ordered  geometry  of 
the  four-dimensional  continuum  shows  that  the  boundary 
region  which  separates  the  two  is  a  three-dimensional 
region  which  belongs  to  neither.  This  three-dimensional 


76       SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

region  will  be  called  the  'causal  future'  from  P.  It  has 
all  the  properties  that  we  want  for  an  atomic  region 
completely  defined  by  P  and  for  its  delimitation  not 
dependent  upon  any  contingent  characters  of  the  rest 
of  nature. 

The  atomic  physical  field  of  the  mass-particle  at  P  is 
P's  causal  future  together  with  P  itself.  We  will  call 
P  the  origin  of  the  field.  The  physical  character  of  this 
field  as  a  whole  is  what  is  meant  by  the  mass-particle 
at  P.  This  is  merely  Faraday's  conception  of  the  tubes 
of  force  as  constituting  the  physical  particle,  with  the 
modification  that  the  tubes  in  the  act  of  streaming 
through  space  also  stream  through  time.  Conceived 
under  the  guise  of  time  and  permanent  space  the  mass- 
particle  is  a  transmission  of  physical  character  along  its 
lines  of  force  with  a  definite  finite  velocity. 

Metrical  Formulae.  A  few  mathematical  formulae 
are  now  necessary  for  my  argument.  The  assumption, 
adopted  as  the  simplest  representation  of  observed  facts, 
that  the  permanent  space  of  each  time-system  is 
Euclidean,  leads  to  the  formulae  of  the  special  theory 
of  relativity.  There  is  however  this  difference  that  the 
critical  velocity  c  has  no  reference  to  light,  and  merely 
expresses  the  fact  that  a  lapse  of  time  and  a  stretch  of 
spatial  route  can  be  congruent  to  each  other. 

Define  the  quantities 

OV,    |>  =  1,2,  3,  4J| 

by  <=1,    |>  =  1,  2,  3] |    (1). 

o>/=  -c2 

Let  a  rectangular  Cartesian  system  of  coordinates  in 
the  permanent  space  of  the  'x'  time-system  be  (xlt  x2)  xs) 
and  let  the  lapse  of  x-time  since  zero  time  be  x4 .  Thus 
(xlt  x2,  xs,  x4)  are  the  four  coordinates  of  an  event- 


iv]     SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       77 

particle,  which  we  will  name  X.  Also  in  the  ly'  time- 
system,  we  denote  analogously  a  permanent  point  by 
the  Cartesian  coordinates  (ylt  y3,  ya)  and  a  lapse  of 
y-time  by  y,.  Let  (y,9  y^y^  y,}  and  (xl9  xz,  x3,  x4)  denote 
the  same  event-particle. 

Then  [cf.  The  Principles  of  Natural  Knowledge,  Ch. 
xin]  the  relations  between  the  two  systems  of  coordi 
nates,  the  *x'  system  and  the  'y'  system,  are  of  the  form 
^(^-^)  =  2^awaxa,    |>  =  1,  2,  3,  4]...  (2), 

a 

where  the  symbol  S  means  summation  for  a  =  1,  2,  3,  4 
successively,  and  the  I's  are  constants  satisfying  the 
conditions  2^  =  0,  0*j8]l 

-1,  [a-fflj 

These  conditions  entail  analogous  formulae  for  the  con 
verse  transformation  from  '?/'  to  '#.' 

It  follows  that,  if  the  coordinates  of  another  event- 
particle,  named  P,  be  (plt  pz,  p3,  p4)  in  the  'x'  system 
and  (qlt  q,,  q3,  q,)  in  the  y  system, 


Let  r(X)  and  r^  be  respectively  the  x-distance  and  the 
^/-distance  between  X  and  P.  Then  this  invariant  for 
X  and  P  can  be  expressed  indifferently  either  by 


IA\ 
or  by  '         ' 


Then 

(i)  X  and  P  are  co-present,  if 

cPfa-jpjr-ffr^O, 

(ii)  P  is  kinematically  antecedent  to  JT,  if 

X4>j94,  and  C2(x4-p4)2-r(:r)2>0, 
(iii)  X  lies  in  the  causal  future  from  P,  if 


78       SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

Routes  of  Adjectival  Particles.  Let  the  mass-particle 
M  be  situated  at  X  and  the  mass-particle  m  be  situated 
at  P,  and  let  X'  and  Pf  be  event-particles  respectively 
neighbouring  to  X  and  P  on  the  historical  routes  of  M 
and  m  in  the  four-dimensional  continuum  of  nature. 
Let  their  coordinates  be  respectively 

(x^  +  dx^  ...)  and  (p^  +  dp^  ...),  [ju  =  l,  2,  3,  4]. 
These  are  accordingly  infinitesimal  invariants  dGM~  and 
dGn?,  respectively  expressing  a  spatio-temporal  property 
of  the  kinematic  elements  XX'  and  PPr.  This  property 
depends  on  the  existence  of  the  whole  bundle  of  diverse 
time-systems  without  special  emphasis  on  any  one  of  them. 
These  invariants  [cf.  equation  (4)]  are  expressed  by 


Let  the  route  of  M  be  expressed  by  assuming  xlt  xz,  x3 
to  be  appropriate  functions  of  o?4J  and  the  route  of  m  by 
assuming  plt  p«,  ps  to  be  appropriate  functions  of  p^. 
Thus,  always  in  reference  to  these  assumptions,  we  write 


Also  we  put 
and 


vm* 


and 


Impetus.     In  order  to  exhibit  the  character  of  the 
physical  field  due  to  a  mass-particle  we  must  consider 


iv]     SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       79 

it  as  pervading  a  kinematic  element,  which  has  the 
advantage  over  an  event-particle  of  retaining  the  quality 
of  historic  passage.  A  loss  of  spatial  dimensions  is  com 
paratively  immaterial,  though  it  probably  represents  a 
simplification  beyond  anything  which  obtains  in  nature. 

In  expressing  the  physical  field  due  to  ra  we  must 
therefore  consider  the  kinematic  element  PPr  of  its 
route.  Also  we  must  take  any  arbitrary  element  XX', 
and  consider  how  its  qualifications  as  a  possible  kine 
matic  element  of  the  route  of  Mare  affected  by  the  fact 
that  m  pervades  the  element  PP'. 

Each  kinematic  element,  such  as  XX',  having  X  as 
initial  starting-point  will  have  certain  physical  charac 
ters.  The  assemblage  of  quantities  defining  these 
physical  characters  for  this  pencil  of  elements  constitutes 
the  physical  field  at  X.  The  two  such  characters  which 
we  need  consider,  as  qualifying  XX'  for  pervasion  by 
M,  are  its  potential  mass  impetus  and  its  potential 
electromagnetic  impetus. 

The  potential  mass  impetus  along  XX'  will  be  written 
JdJ2,  and  the  potential  electromagnetic  impetus  will 
be  written  dF.  If  the  mass  of  the  particle  M  be  also 
denoted  by  M,  and  its  electric  charge,  in  electrostatic 
units,  by  E,  then  the  realised  mass  impetus  due  to 
pervasion  of  XX'  by  M  will  be 


and  the  realised  electromagnetic  impetus,  due  to  the 
same  pervasion,  will  be 

c~lEdF. 

The  total  impetus  along  XX'  realised  by  its  pervasion 
by  M  is 

(9). 


80       SOME  PKINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

Summing  along  the  route  of  M  between  the  assigned 
event-particles  A  to  B,  we  obtain  the  realised  impetus 
along  this  route  which  is  symbolised  by 


A 

If  this  total  impetus  is  to  be  finite,  it  is  evident  that 
JdJ*  and  dF  must  be  homogeneous  functions  of  duiy 
duz,  du3,  du±  of  the  first  degree,  where  (u19  u^  u3,  u4) 
are  any  generalised  coordinates  of  X.  Thus,  guided 
empirically  by  the  ascertained  character  of  dynamical 
equations  and  of  the  electromagnetic  field,  we  can  assume 


Thus  \\jy\\  is  a  symmetric  covariant  tensor  of  the  second 
order  and  ||jF*J?||  is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  first  order. 
The  elements  of  these  tensors  are  functions  of  the  co 
ordinates  of  X,  that  is,  of  (u19  u2,u3)  u4).  These  tensors 
define  the  physical  field  at  X  so  far  as  inertial  and  electro 
magnetic  properties  are  concerned. 
Hence,  writing  as  above 


for  differentiation  along  the  route  of  M,  -=—  is  a  function 

of  u1}  u.2,  u3,  and  of  u19  u2,  u3,  u4.  We  now  assume  that 
the  actual  route  of  M  satisfies  the  condition  that  the 
realised  impetus  is  stationary  between  A  and  B  for 
small  variations  of  route.  We  thus  obtain  the  equations 
of  motion 

0,  [M  =1,2,  a]  ...(ii). 


iv]     SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       81 

Expression  for  the  Gravitational  Field.  I  will  now 
confine  myself  to  the  proper  determination  of  dJ2,  as 
affected  by  the  existence  of  other  mass-particles  m,  m', 
etc.,  in  other  routes.  In  expressing  the  conditions  re 
straining  the  contingency  of  appearance  it  is  necessary 
that  we  have  recourse  to  that  aspect  of  nature  which  is 
independent  of  this  contingency.  The  only  such  aspect 
is  that  arising  from  spatio-temporal  properties.  Also 
dGM2  and  dG^  are  the  invariants  expressing  the  quan 
titative  aspect  of  the  historical  passage  of  the  elements 
XX'  and  PP'. 

Again  in  considering  the  physical  character  of  XX' 
as  affected  by  m  in  its  route,  we  must  select  that 
kinematic  element  PPf  of  m's  route  which  is  causally 
correlated  with  XX'.  By  this  I  mean  that  PPf  has  a 
point-wise  correlation  with  XX'  such  that  X  is  in  the 
causal  future  from  P  and  X'  is  in  the  causal  future 
from  P  '.  With  this  correlation  the  physical  character 
of  PP'  is  already  determined  when  XX'  occurs. 

This  assumption  of  causal  correlation  is  mathematically 
expressed  by  the  relation 

x,-p,  =  r(x]jc  ..................  (12) 

between  corresponding  event-particles  on  XX'  and  PP'  . 

The  main  empirical  facts  of  gravitation  are  expressed 
by  the  assumption  that 

.........  (13), 


where  2  means  the  summation  for  all  mass-particles 

m 

such  as  m  in  kinematic  elements  such  as  PP1  ',  causally 
correlated  to  XX',  and  ^m  expresses  the  gravitational 
law  of  fading  intensity.  The  factor  2/c2  is  inserted  so 
that,  when  the  main  intensity  is  empirically  adjusted 
w.  R.  6 


82       SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

to  give  the  main  inverse  square  law  of  gravitation,  Vm 
may  be  the  analogue  of  the  familiar  gravitational  poten 
tial  at  X  due  to  m.  It  is  easy  to  prove  [cf.  Part  III]  that, 
apart  from  any  assumption  of  causal  correlation  between 
J^andP, 

^mM^4-p4)-£n} 

has  an  invariant  value  for  all  sets  of  rectangular  Car 
tesian  coordinates  in  all  time-systems.  Also  with  the 
causal  correlation  between  PPr  and  XX'  which  we  are 
assuming,  this  invariant  expression  reduces  to 

&m{r(x]-£m}' 

Accordingly,  guided  by  our  knowledge  of  the  Newtonian 
law  of  gravitation,  we  assume 

v  -  _  r^  _  (14:) 

"Q.  {«•«-«" 

where  y  is  the  familiar  constant  of  gravitation  so  as  to 
produce  the  scale  of  intensity  of  the  main  inverse  square 
Newtonian  term. 
If  we  write 


then  in  an  empty  region  M*  satisfies 


We  might,  if  we  had  preferred  to  do  so,  have  started 
from  the  differential  equation  as  the  only  invariant  form 
of  linear  differential  equation  of  the  second  order,  and 
then  deduced  the  above  solution  for  ^m  as  the  only  in 
variant  solution  for  a  single  point-wise  discontinuity. 
The  procedure  of  thought  which  I  have  adopted  seems  to 
me  to  be  better  suited  to  throw  into  relief  the  funda 
mental  ideas  concerning  nature. 


iv]     SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       83 
Comparison  with  Einstein  s  Law.   In  the  formula 


corresponds  to  Einstein's  proper  timers.  By  identi 
fying  the  potential  mass  impetus  of  a  kinematic  element 
with  a  spatio-temporal  measurement  Einstein,  in  my 
opinion,  leaves  the  whole  antecedent  theory  of  measure 
ment  in  confusion,  when  it  is  confronted  with  the  actual 
conditions  of  our  perceptual  knowledge.  The  potential 
impetus  shares  in  the  contingency  of  appearance.  It 
therefore  follows  that  measurement  on  his  theory  lacks 
systematic  uniformity  and  requires  a  knowledge  of  the 
actual  contingent  physical  field  before  it  is  possible. 
For  example,  we  could  not  say  how  far  the  image  of  a 
luminous  object  lies  behind  a  looking-glass  without 
knowing  what  is  actually  behind  that  looking-glass. 

The  above  formula,  assumed  for  dJ2,  also  differs  from 
Einstein's.  In  his  procedure  the  e/'s  are  conditioned  by 
making  them  satisfy  the  contracted  Reimann-Christoffel 
tensor  equations.  He  obtains  a  solution  of  these  equa 
tions  for  a  single  point-singularity  under  the  assumption 
that  the  gravitational  field  is  permanent  for  the  coordi 
nates  adopted  so  that  no  elements  of  the  array  ||«/^||  are 
functions  of  the  time  in  the  system  of  coordinates 
adopted.  This  limitation  rules  out  any  application  of  this 
solution  to  cases  like  that  of  the  moon's  motion,  where 
the  sun  and  earth  evidently  cannot  both  produce  gravita 
tional  fields  permanent  for  the  same  system  of  coordi 
nates.  My  formula,  given  above,  applies  generally  to  all 
such  cases.  It  is  a  matter  for  investigation  whether  the 
small  terms  depending  on  the  motions  thereby  introduced 
into  the  gravitational  formulae  produce  effects  which 

6—2 


84      SOME  PKINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

are  verified  in  observation  as  recorded  in  the  discrepancies 
of  the  moon's  tables.  I  have  traced  some  theoretical 
effects  of  these  terms  of  the  order  of  magnitude  of  one 
or  two  seconds  of  arc  with  periods  of  the  order  of  a 
month  or  a  year,  but  I  have  not  yet  succeeded  in  hitting 
on  a  term  of  a  period  long  enough  to  aggregate  an  ob 
servable  effect,  having  regard  to  the  state  of  the  moon's 
tables.  We  want  periods  of  about  250  years. 

If  the  above  formula  gives  results  which  are  discre 
pant  with  observation,  it  would  be  quite  possible  with 
my  general  theory  of  nature  to  adopt  Einstein's  formula, 
based  upon  his  differential  equations,  for  the  determina 
tion  of  the  gravitational  field.  They  have  however,  as 
initial  assumptions,  the  disadvantage  of  being  difficult 
to  solve  and  not  linear.  But  it  is  purely  a  matter  for 
experiment  to  decide  which  formula  gives  the  small 
corrections  which  are  observed  in  nature.  So  far  as 
matters  stand  at  present  both  formulae  give  the  motion 
of  Mercury's  perihelion,  my  formula  gives  a  possible  shift 
of  the  spectral  lines  dependent  upon  the  structure  of  the 
molecule  and  on  the  interplay  of  the  gravitational  and 
electromagnetic  fields,  and  lastly,  assuming  a  well-known 
modification  of  Maxwell's  equations  giving  such  an 
interplay,  the  famous  eclipse  results  follow^. 

Alternative  Laws  of  Gravitation.  Perhaps  neither  of 
the  above  formulae  will  survive  further  tests  of  other 
delicate  observations.  In  this  event  we  are  not  at  the 
end  of  our  resources.  There  are,  in  addition  to  Einstein's, 
yet  two  other  sets  of  tensor  differential  equations  which 
on  the  theory  of  nature  explained  in  this  lecture  satisfy 
all  the  general  requirements.  These  requirements  are, 
(i)  to  have  no  arbitrary  reference  to  any  one  particular 

*  In  Part  II  the  'Limb  Effect'  and  the  doubling  or  trebling  of  the 
spectral  lines  are  also  deduced. 


iv]      SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       85 

time-system,  and  (ii)  to  give  the  Newtonian  term  of  the 
inverse  square  law,  and  (iii)  to  yield  the  small  correc 
tions  which  explain  various  residual  results  which 
cannot  be  deduced  as  effects  of  the  main  Newtonian 
law. 

The  possibility  of  other  such  laws,  expressed  in  sets 
of  differential  equations  other  than  Einstein's,  arises 
from  the  fact  that  on  my  theory  there  is  a  relevant 
fact  of  nature  which  is  absent  on  Einstein's  theory. 
This  fact  is  the  whole  bundle  of  alternative  time  strati 
fications  arising  from  the  uniform  significance  of  events. 
It  is  expressed,  without  emphasis  on  any  one  such 
time-system,  by  the  Galilean  tensor  |(?jj?||.  This  tensor 
is  defined  by  the  property  that,  when  expressed  in 
terms  of  rectangular  Cartesian  coordinates  (#„  x.2J  x3,  x4) 
for  any  time-system  '  x,' 

,     . 


Thus  we  have  on  hand  two  tensors,  the  above  Galilean 
tensor  and  the  tensor  of  the  gravitational  field  which  is 

ira- 

In  order  to  formulate  the  differential  equations  in 
volving  the  gravitational  laws  we  shall  require  the 
three-index  symbols  of  the  first  and  second  types  for 
both  the  tensors  ||  J"MJ  and  1  6rMJ.  They  will  be  written"3" 


for  the  symbols  of  the  first  type,  and 

J>*,  X}<«>  and  G{^\}(u) 

for  the  symbols  of  the  second  type.  Also  the  associate 
contravariant  tensors  are  written  ||  J&H  and  ||  6rg5||,  and 
the  determinant  \J($  is  symbolised  by  J(u\ 

*  Cf.  Part  II,  Chapter  v,  equation  (8),   and  Chapter  vi,  equa 
tion  (13). 


86       SOME  PKINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE     [CH 

(i)  Einstein's  Law  is 


(19). 


The  two  other  laws  which  involve  differential  equations 
depend  upon  making  the  proper  substitutions  for  the 
mixed  tensor  M  Tr\  \\ 


in  the  following  tensor  equations 

^^log{- <?<*>}*] 
-22[J5T 


=  o, 


-  ...(20). 


(ii)  In  this  law  the  mixed  tensor 
equation  is  to  stand  for 


(iii)  In  this  law  the  mixed  tensor 
tion  above  is  to  stand  for 


of  the  above 


of  the  equa 


-  22 


G 


where  ||  T*$)  \\  is  some  contravariant  tensor  arising 
from  some  quality  of  the  electromagnetic  field.  This 
law  is  suited  to  express  the  interaction  (if  any)  of  the 
electromagnetic  field  on  the  gravitational  field. 

If  the  equations  of  laws  (ii)  and  (iii)  be  referred  to 
rectangular  Cartesian  coordinates,  they  become 


(ii)    2^2 
and 


=  0,  [,u,v=l,2,3,4] (21), 


(Hi)   ??;wT 


=  0,   [>,  *-  1,  2,  3,  4]    (22). 


iv]     SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE       87 

(iv)  The  fourth  law  has  already  been  considered.    It 
can  be  expressed  in  the  integral  form 


-.(23), 


where  the  kinematic  element  corresponding  to  dGm*  is 
causally  correlated  to  that  corresponding  to  dGMz. 

According  to  this  law  the  fundamental  character  of 
inertial  properties  is  derived  from  their  intimate  con 
nection  with  the  abstract  measure  of  uniform  process 
in  the  spatio-temporal  field.  Thus  JdG^  and  JdGm2 
are  these  abstract  measures  of  spatio-temporal  process 
in  the  elements  XX'  and  PPf  of  the  tracks  of  M 
and  m  respectively.  The  inertial  physical  field  modifies 
this  abstract  measure  of  process  into  the  more  concrete 
potential  impetus  Jd>P,  and  full  concreteness,  so  far 
as  it  is  ascribable  to  nature,  is  obtained  in  the  realised 
impetus  M  JdJ\ 

Rotation.  In  conclusion  I  will  for  one  moment  draw 
your  attention  to  rotation.  The  effects  of  rotation  are 
among  the  most  widespread  phenomena  of  the  apparent 
won  exemplified  in  the  most  gigantic  nebulae  and  in 
the  Hiinutest  molecules.  The  most  obvious  fact  about 
rotational  effects  are  their  apparent  disconnections  from 
outlying  phenomena.  Rotation  is  the  stronghold  of 
those  who  believe  that  in  some  sense  there  is  an  abso 
lute  space  to  provide  a  framework  of  dynamical  axes. 
Newton  cited  it  in  support  of  this  doctrine.  The  Ein 
stein  theory  in  explaining  gravitation  has  made  rotation 
an  entire  mystery.  Is  the  earth's  relation  to  the  stars 
the  reason  why  it  bulges  at  the  equator  ?  Are  we  to 
understand  that  if  there  were  a  larger  proportion  of 
run-away  stars,  the  earth's  polar  and  equatorial  axes 


88     SOME  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE  [CHIV 

would  be  equal,  and  that  the  nebulae  would  lose  their 
spiral  form,  and  that  the  influence  of  the  earth's  rotation 
on  meteorology  would  cease  ?  Is  it  the  influence  of  the 
stars  which  prevents  the  earth  from  falling  into  the  sun  ? 
The  theory  of  space  and  time  given  in  this  lecture,  with 
its  fundamental  insistence  on  the  bundle  of  time-systems 
with  their  permanent  spaces,  provides  the  necessary 
dynamical  axes  and  thus  accounts  for  these  fundamental 
phenomena.  I  hold  this  fact  to  be  a  strong  argument 
in  its  favour,  based  entirely  on  the  direct  results  of 
experience. 

Conclusion.  The  course  of  my  argument  has  led 
me  generally  to  couple  my  allusions  to  Einstein  with 
some  criticism.  But  that  does  not  in  any  way  repre 
sent  my  attitude  towards  him.  My  whole  course  of 
thought  presupposes  the  magnificent  stroke  of  genius 
by  which  Einstein  and  Minkowski  assimilated  time  and 
space.  It  also  presupposes  the  general  method  of  seek 
ing  tensor  or  invariant  relations  as  general  expressions 
for  the  laws  of  the  physical  field,  a  method  due  to 
Einstein.  But  the  worst  homage  we  can  pay  to  genius 
is  to  accept  uncritically  formulations  of  truths  which 
we  owe  to  it. 


PART  II 

PHYSICAL  APPLICATIONS 


CHAPTER  V 

THE  EQUATIONS  OF  MOTION 

THE  equations  of  motion  of  a  mass-particle  (M)  are 
[cf.  Chapter  iv,  equation  (11)] 

^L^_JL^=0,  o-i,2,3]...(i), 

where  [cf.  Chapter  iv,  equation  (9)] 

dl=  MJdJ*  +  c~l  EdF (2). 

We  write 

dJ*  =  dGM*  —  2  2g($  du^du,  (3), 


^        dup        du^   ' 
Then  the  equations  of  motion  can  be  written 

M  *-(-i<?r 


/5\ 


&p>    [ft  =  1,2,  3]. ..(6), 
p 

where  (uiy  uZ9  us,  u^)  are  any  generalised  coordinates  of 
the  situation  of  M. 

If  (xlt  xz,  x3,  x4)  are  Cartesian  coordinates  for  the 
spatio-temporal  system  '#,'  these  equations  become 

d  Mx^  _^_^p,^^^^rnn.  ^(x) 


xf,   0=1,2,3] (7), 

where 


92  THE  EQUATIONS  OF  MOTION  [CHV 

and  F  is  written  for  T(x]  .    We  write  2'  for  summation 

p 

for  p  =  1,  2,  3,  excluding  p  =  4.    Then  the  terms 


are  called  the  'pure  centrifugal  gravitational'  terms, 
the  terms 


are   called   the    'composite    centrifugal    gravitational' 
terms,  and  the  term 


is  the  'pure  gravitational'  term.   Also 


is  the  electric  force  [electrostatic  units]  and 

(rF(x}    rF(x}    ^F(x}) 
\cr  23  ,  cr  31  ,  CJT  12  / 

is  the  magnetic  force. 

It  is  convenient  to  note  for  future  reference  that 
[cf.  Chapter  iv,  equations  (5)  and  (7)] 


x  ,  . 

m  =  c*cim-*dP;r 

Also  if  c(xt-p<)  =  r(x)t 

fir 
then  dp,  =  dx,-^  ...............  (10). 


CHAPTER  VI 

ON  THE  FORMULA  FOR  dJ2 

WE  adopt  the  formula  [cf.  Chapter  iv,  equation  (17)] 


where  c  (x4  —  p4)  =  r   ..................  (2), 

and  m  is  a  typical  member  of  the  attracting  particles, 
situated  at  (plt  p«,  p.3,  p4),  and  r  stands  for  r(x)  in 
Chapter  iv. 

Then  [cf.  equations  (3),  (9)  and  (10)  of  Chapter  v] 

tta(x)dx  dx  -  2  2       ym       dG  2 
M,,,  ctx  ajuv  —     z,       7~u  *** 


2ym 


Thus 


,        dr\ 
4" 


...(3). 


dr   dr 


2ym         dr  /dr        .      r 

-'su-«  •  O*4] 


...(4). 


Also 


'    L/^*    J 


>4  1  dr         r         Sr 


>  C    9^M 


...(5). 


94  ON  THE  FORMULA  FOR  dJ*  [OH 

Also 


The  Potentials.  It  is  convenient  to  express  the  com 
ponents  of  ||  J^v  |t  in  terms  of  various  potential  functions 
which  have  either  a  tensor  or  an  invariant  character 
for  transformations  between  space-time  systems.  We 
will  limit  our  statements  to  rectangular  Cartesian 
coordinates. 

(i)  The  General  Potential.  This  is  symbolised  by  3>, 
where 


Vp^  ...(7). 

o    m  t*- 

Here,  as  elsewhere,  it  is  to  be  noticed  that  (xlt  x2,  x3,  #4) 
lies  in  the  causal  future  of  (plt  p^  p3,  p4)  where  m  is 
situated  ;  so  that 

c(x,-p.)  =  r. 

This  condition  always  holds  unless  a  special  exception 
is  made. 

<l>  is  invariant.    For 


is  invariant.  Also,  dropping  for  the  moment  the  causal 
relation  between 

(a^,  a?8f  a?,,  x,)  and  (plt  pt,  p»,  p<), 
£lm{c(Xt-pt)-£}  and  nw- 


vi]  ON  THE  FORMULA  FOR  dJ*  95 

are  invariant.    Hence 


is  invariant.    Hence,  replacing  the  causal  relation  after 
differentiation,  we  immediately  find  that 

OJ  2'  (*„  -pjp,  -  \  <V  (r  -  f  )  2'lVP, 

is  invariant.    The  in  variance  of  3>  immediately  follows. 
(ii)   The  Tensor  Potential.    This  is  a  covariant  tensor 
of  the  first  order,  symbolised  by 


where  ^=  _2  ...............  (8). 

m  d*  (r  —  £  ) 

The  tensor  property  follows  from  the  fact  that 

«.(*•-£) 

is  invariant,  and  that 

II  A.  V^  II 

is  a  covariant  tensor. 
We  note  that  = 


(iii)  The  First  Associate  Potential.  This  is  symbolised 
by  A,  where 

A-S^^r-S)    ............  (10). 

Ttl     C 

It  is  obvious  that  A  is  invariant. 

(iv)  The  Second  Associate  Potential.    This  is  sym 
bolised  by  B,  where 

.........  (11). 


It  is  obvious  that  B  is  invariant. 


96  ON  THE  FORMULA  FOR  dJ*  ICH 

Then,  neglecting  terms  involving  c~3  as  a  factor, 

=  (c2  +  6<S>)  dx?  -  (l+  -2  ¥,  ]  ^Jdx*  -  82  ^p  dxpdx, 


...(12). 


It  is  now  easy  to  transform  to  any  other  pure  spatial 
coordinates  in  the  '  x  '-space  by  noting  that 


is  a  vector  in  the  os-space,  and  that 

2  z—  dx0  =  dB. 

P  dxp 

and  that,  in  any  coordinate  system  (u19  uZ9  u2 


is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  second  order,  whatever  may 
be  the  coordinates  (ult  ua)  u.3,  u±).  Here^  (r{^,  p}(u)  is 
the  ChristofFel  three-index  symbol  defined  by 

0fcu%p}«-Sflfo0[/u%a]W   (13). 

Furthermore,  to  our  order  of  approximation  [i.e.  neg 
lecting  terms  involving  c~3],  the  terms  involving  B  will 
disappear  from  the  equations  of  motion.  Accordingly 
from  this  source  no  terms  arise  in  these  equations  which 
involve  c"1.  We  shall  also  show  that  no  terms  of  this 
order  of  magnitude  arise  from  <I>,  since  these  terms 
disappear  from  the  approximate  expression  for  <£. 

The  Contemporary  Positions.  It  is  often  more  con 
venient  to  express  the  formulae  in  terms  of  the  positions 
of  the  attracting  particles  in  the  x-space  contemporary 
with  the  event-particle  (x19  x2,  x39  x4).  Let  this  con 
temporary  position  of  the  particle  m  be  (q19  q2,  q3,  x4). 

*  The  definition  of  «7gJ  and  of  Gfi^  is  given  in  Chapter  x,  equation 
(3),  below,  and  that  of  G[pv,  p](u}  in  Chapter  v,  equation  (8),  above. 


vi]  ON  THE  FORMULA  FOR  dJ*  97 

We  have  to  assume  that  r/c  is  a  small  time.    Then 


Let  R  be  the  x-distance  between  (a;,,  a;2,  a;,)  and  (qlt  q,,  q3), 
and 

1-' 

.(15). 


Then  [cf.  equation  (14)] 


.  -.(16). 


We  write 


for  suiBficient  approximations  to  the  various  potential 
functions,  neglecting  terms  involving  c~3. 
Then 


' 


.-(18), 


m     C 
W.  R. 


.(19). 

7 


98  ON  THE  FOKMULA  FOR  dJ*  [CH 


We  note  that        V(x)M°  =  -2  2        ...............  (20), 

C  " 

s2     s2 
v    •+ 


It  easily  follows  [cf.  equation  (20)]  that,  if  the  attract 
ing  matter  be  a  uniform  sphere  in  the  x-space  of  mass 
M'  and  of  radius  a,  then  at  a  distance  R0  from  the 
centre  of  the  sphere  and  for  points  outside  the  sphere 
[i.e.  R^a] 

(21), 

(22), 

(23): 


and  for  points  inside  the  sphere  [i.e.  R  <  a] 


Associated  Space.  We  now  introduce  new  co 
ordinates  (Xlf  Xz,  Xs,  X4)  which  are  not  in  general  pure 
spatio-temporal  coordinates  (unless  the  attracting  Jbodies 
be  at  rest  in  the  os-space),  but  are  closely  associated 
with  the  Cartesian  coordinates  (xltxz,xz,  x4).  We  write 

1      ;)  Jo 


We  can  then  by  an  easy  transformation  deduce 


dJ"  =  (c2  +  64>°)  dX;  - 

& 

j  -(27). 

t  +  42     -  dXfdXt 


VI] 


ON  THE  FORMULA  FOR  dJ* 


It  is  to  be  noticed  that  (Xlt  Xz,  X3,  JQare  transformed  to 
(Y19  Y2,  Y3,  F4)  cogrediently  with  the  transformation  of 
(xlf  x2,  x3,  #4)  to  (ylt  2/2,  t/3,  y4).  Hence  we  can  conceive 
that  (Xlt  X^  X3,  X4)  and  (Ylt  F2,  F3,  F4)  are  two  sets 
of  rectangular  coordinates  to  an  event-particle  in  an 
'Associated  Space-Time  Continuum.' 

Then  corresponding  to  a  path  in  the  #-space  tra 
versed  with  velocity  (xlt  x.2,  x3),  there  is  a  path  in  the 
associate  space  traversed  with  velocity  (Xlt  X,,  X^), 
where 


Y    -^ 

~~ 


=  1,2,  3,  4]. 


Also  we  write 

and 

Now  put 


,(28). 


A=    1  + 


2     ym 
<?.  R 


(29). 


The  equations  of  motion  [cf.  equation  (6),  Chapter  v, 
and  equation  (27)  of  this  chapter]  now  become  [for 
/*=!,  2,  3] 


1  +    JT 


°  -  3*°) 


where 


=      _ 


...(30), 


.(31), 

7-2 


100  ON  THE  FORMULA  FOR  dJ*  [CH  vi 

and  (since  ||  F^  ||  is  a  co variant  tensor) 

1  rP  /4° 

F^^F^+^J-^F^^-  (32). 

«  c2a>a          dxpdxa 

We  note  that  throughout  the  small  terms  we  can 
neglect  the  distinction  between  the  true  and  the 
associate  continua. 


CHAPTER  VII 

PERMANENT  GRAVITATIONAL  FIELDS 

WHEN  the  attracting   masses    (m15  m2,  ...)    are   per 
manently  at  rest  in  the  x-space,  we  obtain  those  par 
ticular  cases  of  gravitational  action  for  which  Einstein's 
general  equations  of  condition  have  been  solved. 
We  now  have 


T,=^;=O,    0=1,2,3] 

X,  =  xt 

Hence  [cf.  equation  (27)  of  Chapter  vi] 
a-  =  (c2-2^ 4)  dX? 


and  [cf.  equation  (12)  of  Chapter  vi] 
=  (c2  -  2¥4)  dxt*  -    l  +     ¥<    S' 


Thus  the  equations  of  motion  become 

A. 
dXt 


....(2). 


CHAPTER  VIII 

APPARENT  MASS  AND  THE  SPECTRAL  SHIFT 

IN  the  first  place  consider  the  vibration  of  some  in 
ternal  part  of  a  molecule.  Let  M  be  its  mass  and  V  its 
undisturbed  velocity.  Then  in  the  absence  of  gravitation 


and  in  the  presence  of  gravitation 


But  in  either  case  Mt±  is  the  effective  mass.  Accord 
ingly,  assuming  that  the  electromagnetic  forces  which 
bind  together  the  molecule  are  unaltered  by  the  presence 
of  the  gravitational  field,  the  period  of  vibration  is 
lengthened  in  this  field  from 

T  to 


where  ST/T-^v;  ..................  (3). 

But  the  electromagnetic  forces  will  be  affected  by  the 
field.  Accordingly,  it  requires  some  knowledge  of  the 
structure  of  the  molecule  to  be  certain  what  the  shift 
(if  any)  of  the  spectral  lines  should  be. 

For  example,  assuming  the  electromagnetic  laws  con 
sidered  under  Chapters  x  and  xui  below  and  assuming 
that  the  cohesive  forces  of  an  atom  depend  on  the 
statical  distribution  of  electric  charges,  the  presence  of 


CH  vm]    APPARENT  MASS  AND  SPECTRAL  SHIFT      103 

the  gravitational  potential  will  (on  the  average)  change 
any  such  cohesive  force  from  F  to 


according  to  the  formula  (10*1)  of  Chapter  xm  below. 
Thus  the  shift  would  now  become 

*,V;  ..................  (4). 


The  whole  question  is  discussed  in  detail  in  Chapters 
xm,  xiv,  and  xv  below. 


CHAPTER  IX 

PLANETARY  MOTION 

LET  the  sun  be  the  only  gravitating  body  and  let  it 
be  permanently  at  rest  in  the  cc-space  at  the  spatial 
origin  of  the  coordinate-system  (x19  xz,  xs).  The  corre 
sponding  polar  coordinates  are  (r19  ra,  r3).  Then 

,    A  =  ymr^  ............  (1). 


Hence  *,  =  a>l  -          ,  [>=  1,  2,  3]...  (2). 

We  then  put 

............  (3), 


and  evidently  (JBj,  r2,  rs)  are  the  polar  coordinates  in 
the  associate  space  of  the  point  (X19  Xz,  X3). 

Consider  uniplanar  motion  of  a  planet  in  the  plane 

rf  =  0. 
The  equations  of  motion  become 


O-0  .....................  (5). 

Thus  ^R^rt  =  h  .....................  (6). 

Then  transferring  to  r2  as  independent  variable  and 
putting 

«=1/^  .....................  (7), 

we  find 


CHIX]  PLANETARY  MOTION  105 

But,  to  our  approximation, 

y'ra'V 
¥4  =  yww-£—  j—  ...............  (9). 

c/ 

Thus  the  equation  becomes 


Now  K  is  the  constant  energy  of  the  orbit  on  the  sup 
position  that  c  is  infinite.    Hence,  to  our  approximation, 
c~*K  is  constant. 
We  now  put 

u  =  ri(l+ecos0)     ............  (11), 

where 

6  =  (l-k)rz  +  a    ...............  (12), 

and  immediately  deduce 

4    \  . 

(lo) 


272 
A2  c2/r       c2 

7 

and  A= 


This  value  for  &  is  Einstein's  result. 

The  path  of  the  planet  in  the  as-space  is 


(15). 


l  l 

It  is  to  be  noticed  that  we  have  not  assumed  that  e  is 
small. 

It  is  evident  that  Kepler's  second  law  receives  a  slight 
modification,  since 

hb-1  ..................  (16). 


CHAPTER  X 

ELECTROMAGNETIC  EQUATIONS 

WE  have  to  consider  a  modification  of  the  Maxwell- 
Lorentz  Equations  which  will  exhibit  an  influence  of 
the  gravitational  field  on  the  electromagnetic  field. 

The  electric  and  magnetic  forces  in  the  #-space  are 
expressed  by  the  skew  symmetric  tensor 

II*U 

where 


Hence  it  follows  that,  if 

A 

then 


Thus  one  set  of  four  out  of  the  Maxwell-Lorentz 
equations  is  identically  satisfied.  We  now  choose  the 
remaining  set  of  four  in  a  form  which  exhibits  a  gravi 
tational  influence.  Let  ||  </M"  ||  denote  the  contravariant 
tensor  conjugate  to  ||  J^v  ||,  defined  by 


=  1,    |>  =  v]J   ' 

We    then    define    the    skew    contravariant    tensor 


!(•») 


Then  since  ||  (JF        is  skew, 


is  a  contravariant  tensor. 


CHX]  ELECTROMAGNETIC  EQUATIONS  107 

Also  let  p(x)  be  the  electric  density  in  the  #-space,  so 
that 


is  the  Contra  variant  Electric  Motion  Tensor.  Then  the 
second  set  of  the  remaining  four  of  the  Maxwell-Lorentz 
equations  is 

?l-(jy)S  =  ^*,,    0=1,2,3,4]...(5). 

If  the  circumstances  are  such  that  the  gravitational 
elements  [i.e.  J$~\  can  be  taken  as  constant  throughout 
the  region  of  the  electromagnetic  field,  then  [cf.  eqn. 
(3)  above]  we  can  write  these  equations  in  the  co  variant 
form 

O    J/X*)  A 

ratf-TA  tTTy)      .     w^)  f\  _ 

LA- 


CHAPTER  XI 

GRAVITATION  AND  LIGHT  WAVES 

THE  wave-lengths  of  light  waves  are  short  compared 
with  the  linear  dimensions  of  any  region  within  which 
the  gravitational  elements  vary.  Also  it  is  possible  to 
assign  regions  such  that  the  gravitational  elements  are 
constant  within  them  and  yet  large  enough  to  contain 
areas  of  wave-fronts  of  linear  dimensions  large  com 
pared  to  the  wave-lengths.  Also  any  lengths  expressive 
of  the  curvatures  of  the  wave-fronts  may  be  assumed 
to  be  large  compared  to  the  linear  dimensions  of  such 
regions,  at  least  in  the  application  considered  below. 

It  follows  that  the  characteristic  equations  for  light 
waves  in  uncharged  space  are  [cf.  equation  (6)  of 
Chapter  x] 


In  the  corresponding  coordinates  of  the  associate  con 
tinuum  these  equations  become 


Also  with  our  assumption  as  to  the  constancy  of  the 
e/'s,  X^  is  a  linear  function  of  xlt  x.2)  x3,  #4.  Hence  a 
plane  wave  in  the  x-  space  is  a  plane  wave  in  the  associate 
JT-space. 

Now  assume 


K 


Then  our  conditions  give 

0  ........................  (4), 


CHXI]       GRAVITATION  AND  LIGHT  WAVES  109 


...(5). 


We  derive  therefore  a  determination  of  VFl  +  F4  as  a 
multiple  of  the  small  quantity 


and  the  equation 

V*J£-2VJ£>  +  J&  =  0  ............  (6) 

for  the  determination  of  V. 

Assume  that  the  gravitating  bodies  are  permanently 
at  rest  in  the  x-space.  Then  [cf.  equation  (ri)  of 
Chapter  vn  and  equation  (3)  of  Chapter  x] 


(X) 


Also,  measuring  along  the  normal  (in  JT-space)  to  the 
plane  wave, 


Hence  the  equation  for  V  becomes 

dJ*  =  0  .....................  (9). 

Thus  Einstein's  assumption  is  proved  for  the  normal 
advance  of  very  short  electromagnetic  waves,  such  as  the 
light  waves,  considered  as  advancing  in  associate  space. 
This  result  holds  for  any  short  waves  for  which  the 
radii  of  curvature  of  the  wave-fronts  are  large  compared 
to  the  wave-lengths.  For  then  a  small  area  of  wave- 
front  can  be  treated  as  plane. 

Now  consider  a  ray  from  a  fixed  point  P  to  a  fixed  point 


110  GRAVITATION  AND  LIGHT  WAVES  [OH 

Q  in  the  x-space.  By  Huygheiis'  principle  its  course  is 
given  by  making  the  time  T  to  be  stationary  for  small 
variations  of  the  path  between  these  points.  Now  by 
comparison  with  the  associate  space,  since  the  gravita 
tional  field  is  permanent,  X4  and  x4  are  identical.  Thus 


P  p 

But  V  is  given  by 


=0  ......  (11). 

Now  V  is  nearly  equal  to  c.   Hence  to  our  approximation 


Thus 

P 


Thus,  keeping  PJandjQ  fixed, 

(14). 


Thus  the  associate  path  of  the  ray  in  the  associate  space 
is  obtained  by  assuming  the  associate  space  to  be  filled 
with  a  medium  of  refractive  index 


Also  in  the  particular  case  when  the  gravitational 
field  is  due  to  the  sun,  the  refractive  index  is 


hc2^  ' 

and  since  A  is  a  function  of  i\  only,  the  polar  coordinates 
(r19  ra,  r3)  in  the  #-space  correspond  to  the  polar  co 
ordinates  (R,  r2,  r3)  in  the  JT-space.  Hence  the  angle 
subtended  at  the  sun  by  the  two  points  at  infinity  on 
the  ray  in  the  x-space  is  equal  to  the  analogous  angle 


xi]  GRAVITATION  AND  LIGHT  WAVES  111 

subtended  at  the  sun  by  the  two  points  at  infinity  on 
the  associate  ray  in  the  JT-space.  Thus  Einstein's  result 
as  to  the  deviation  immediately  follows. 

Furthermore,  it  follows  from  the  expression  for  T,  that 
no  modification  of  interference  fringes  can  arise,  due  to 
the  terms  in  dJ2  involving  B,  by  the  use  of  an  apparatus 
by  which  alternative  rays  for  light,  originating  from 
the  same  source  at  P,  are  sent  along  alternative  paths 
from  P  to  Q,  since 

[1     CQ  I  O         \  ~~I  other  path 

\        }+-^\dS\  ...(15). 

Cjp\  C*      V          Jonepath 

If  ^4  be  constant  along  the  paths,  this  equation  be 

comes  other  path       1  /          2        \  ™  other  path       ,  . 

I1  Jonepath          0\l  *tf      4)  L     J  one  path    ' 

Now  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  if  the  axes  of  co 
ordinates  be  fixed  relatively  to  the  surface  and  the  axis 
of  x3  be  vertically  upwards,  we  have  [cf.  equations  (22) 
and  (26)  of  Chapter  vi] 


- 

*-»     5   c2  ' 

where  g  is  the  gravitational  acceleration  and  a  is  the 
earth's  radius. 

It  follows  that  S  =  s. 

Accordingly,  if  the  alternative  geometrical  paths  of  a 
divided  ray  be  of  equal  geometrical  length, 

p  rrrt  other  path  _  ^ 
L      J  one  path 

Thus  in  any  experiment  of  the  Michelson-Morley  type, 
the  earth's  gravitational  field  will  produce  no  modifica 
tion  of  the  interference  fringes.  The  null  result  of  the 
Michelson-Morley  experiment  is  therefore  fully  explained. 


CHAPTER  XII 

TEMPERATURE  EFFECTS  ON  GRAVITATIONAL 
FORCES 

ASSUME  that  the  attracting  body  is  at  rest,  except 
that  its  separate  molecules  have  a  velocity  of  agitation 
of  which  the  mean  square  is  w2.  Let  Av  stand  for 
'Average  value  of.'  Consider 

AvdJ\ 

We  use  the  formula  of  Chapter  vi,  equation  (12),  for 
dJ2  and  the  values  of  the  potentials  given  in  equations  (7) 
to  (1  1)  of  that  chapter.  Then  R  refers  to  the  permanent 
position  of  a  molecule,  neglecting  its  agitation  due 
to  temperature. 

Write 


m    R 

and  note  that 


Then  we  easily  find 
AvdJ*  =  jc2  -  2  (l  +  £  U-\  ^1  ^; 

A 

...(3). 


Thus  the   gravitational   potential  ¥  requires  the  co 
efficient 


due  to  the  temperature  of  the  attracting  body. 


CHXII]       TEMPERATURE  AND  GRAVITATION  113 

The  coefficient  due  to  the  temperature  of  the  attracted 
body  is  complicated  by  the  change  of  apparent  mass  due 
to  the  velocity  of  agitation  and  by  the  possible  effect 
of  this  velocity  on  the  electromagnetic  forces.  Accord 
ingly  the  special  circumstances  must  be  known  before 
any  calculation  can  be  applied. 

Returning  to  the  consideration  of  the  correction  for 
the  temperature  of  the  attracting  body,  let  6r,  and  u?  be 
its  gravitational  attraction  at  a  given  point  and  the 
mean  square  of  its  molecular  velocities  when  its  absolute 
temperature  is  T19  and  G0  and  u^  be  analogous  quan 
tities  when  its  absolute  temperature  is  T0.  Then 

<  =  a7;,     M02  =  aT0 (4), 

where  a  is  some  constant  depending  on  the  physical 
constitution  of  the  body.   For  example,  for  water  vapour 

at  0° 

<=5x  109  [cm.2/sec.2],   T0  =  273°  (5). 

Hence  a=  1'83  x  107  (approx.)   (6). 


Hence,  putting 

a  =  a'xl07 (8), 

we  find 


Thus  the  temperature  correction  due  to  ordinary 
molecular  velocities  is  inappreciable.  It  may  be  the 
case  however  that  we  should  consider  the  velocities 
within  each  molecule,  particularly  within  the  nucleus 
of  an  atom.  It  may  well  be  that  such  velocities  attain 
to  a  sensible  fraction  of  the  velocity  of  light.  The 
temperature  correction  might  then  be  appreciable, 
w.  B.  8 


CHAPTER  XIII 

THE  ELECTROSTATIC  POTENTIAL  AND  SPECTRAL 

SHIFT 

SINCE  the  gravitational  field  is  permanent  [cf.  equation 
(1-2)  of  Chapter  vn] 


=  (c2  -  2^4)  dx?  - 

•'•\     /* 


We  also  assume  (as  in  Chapter  xi)  that  in  the  region 
considered  the  gravitational  field  is  practically  uniform, 
so  that  the  spatial  rate  of  variation  of  g^v  is  negligible. 
This  amounts  to  neglecting  gravitational  accelerations 
but  retaining  gravitational  potentials  or  quasi-potentials. 


Wewrite 


so  that  "^  and  A^  [/x,  v  =  1,  2,  3]  are  constants  through 
out  the  region  considered. 

Neglecting  terms  involving  c~4  as  a  factor,  we  find 


...(4), 
(5), 

(6). 


CHXIII]  ELECTROSTATIC  POTENTIAL  115 

Hence  putting  X  =  4  in  equation  (6)  of  Chapter  x,  we 
find  that  in  a  steady  electromagnetic  field  and  a  per 
manent  gravitational  field,  the  equation  for  the  electro 
static  potential  F±  becomes 


Hence  the  solution  for  a  point-charge  e  at  the  origin  is 

(8), 


where  ?\  is  the  distance  of  the  point  (xlt  x.2,  x3). 

Now  consider  a  number  of  molecules  in  the  region 
each  forming  an  isolated  electrical  system.  Let  each 
molecule  have  an  axis-system  (xlt  x2,  a?3)  at  the  centre 
of  its  nucleus,  and  let  each  such  axis-system  have  the 
same  relation  to  its  electrical  configuration  as  any 
other  such  axis-system  has.  But  the  molecules  are 
orientated  in  every  possible  manner  with  respect  to  the 
gravitating  field. 

Hence  if  e  be  the  charge  at  the  centre  of  the  nucleus 
which  can  be  conceived  as  keeping  the  molecule  together, 
and  —  e'  be  the  charge  of  any  part  of  the  molecule 
whose  vibration  is  being  considered,  it  follows  that  on 
the  average  the  cohesive  radial  force  is 


But  V2 

c 


}  ............  (9). 


Hence  the  average  cohesive  force  on  that  element  of 
the  molecule  is 


8—2 


116  ELECTROSTATIC  POTENTIAL  [CHXIII 

But  the  apparent  mass  of  the  element  due  to  the 
gravitational  potential  is 


where  M  is  its  apparent  mass  in  the  absence  of  the 
field.  Hence,  if  T  be  the  period  of  vibration  of  the 
element  in  the  absence  of  the  gravitational  field  and 
T-}-  Sj  T  in  its  presence, 

?^-L*  (11) 

T  -6c»^«"  .-111J. 

Einstein's  formula  for  the  shift  of  the  spectral  lines  is 


For  observational  purposes  the  two  formulae  are  in 
distinguishable. 


CHAPTER  XIV 

THE  LIMB  EFFECT 

LET  a>  =  aMrlf   [>=1,2,3]  ......  (1). 

Then  [cf.  equation  (8)  of  Chapter  xiu] 

a.}  ............  (2). 


Here  (a1?  a2,  a3)  are  the  direct  ion-  cosines  of  the  vector 
from  the  origin  to  (xlt  x2,  x.A).    Thus  the  radial  force  is 


Now  consider  the  internal  vibration  of  a  molecule 
which  radiates  light  of  period  T  (in  a  non-gravitational 
field)  as  capable  of  being  represented  as  the  vibration 
of  a  variable  electric  Hertzian  doublet  with  this  period. 

Let  (alf  a2,  a3)  be  the  direction-cosines  of  the  axis  of 
the  doublet.  Then  owing  to  the  gravitational  field  the 
electric  force  which  controls  the  vibration  of  the  doublet 
is  changed  by  the  presence  of  the  factor 

M     v  **"       M 

Let  T  become  T+8'T  owing  to  the  joint  effect  of 
this  factor  and  of  the  change  in  the  apparent  mass  of  the 
electrons  forming  the  doublet  (due  to  the  gravitational 
field).  Then 

8'T 


Let  there  be  a  large  number  of  electrons  forming  the 
atmosphere  of  a  star  (say,  the  sun).    Let  the  observer 


118  THE  LIMB  EFFECT  [OH 

be  at  a  great  distance  along  the  axis  of  x^    Put 

c&!  =  cos  Oj,  a2  =  sin  Oj  cos  a2,  a,  =  sin  a:  sin  a2. . . (5). 
Now  doublets  radiate  light  unequally  in  different 
directions.  The  intensity  (measured  by  the  energy 
radiated)  varies  as  the  square  of  the  sine  of  the  colatitude 
of  the  direction,  the  latitude  being  reckoned  from  the 
equatorial  plane  of  the  doublet.  Thus  the  intensity  of 
the  light  from  the  doublet  in  direction  (a,,  a.2,  as)  sent 
to  the  observer  varies  as  sin2  ax.  Also  the  average  change 
of  period  (8T)  of  the  light  sent  to  the  observer  with 
colatitude  a,  (as  reckoned  from  the  equatorial  planes  of 
the  doublets)  is  given  by 

1    p-S'T 

2.    0  -T 

i.e.  by 

S'T     1    3^ 


...(6). 


sin2  ax  —  cos2 


Now  the  light  from  the  molecules  for  which  ax  is 
nearly  90°  will  be  the  brightest,  both  because  of  the 
factor  sinX  in  the  intensity,  and  because  the  equa 
torial  belt  of  angular  space  of  breadth  d^  is  greater 
than  the  belts  of  the  same  angular  breadth  as  c^ 
approaches  zero.  Hence  the  shift  of  the  spectral  lines 
will  approach  that  given  by  taking  ax  =  ?r/2.  This  con 
clusion  is  reinforced  by  the  discussion  of  the  next 
chapter  on  permanent  directions  of  vibration  —  at  least 
so  far  as  relates  to  the  centre  or  the  edge  of  the  sun's 
disc.  Thus 


xiv]  THE  LIMB  EFFECT  119 

Now  let  en  be  the  radius  of  the  sun,  and  let  the  centre 
of  the  sun  be  the  point 

(  —  a  cos  {}„    —  a  cos  /32,    —  a  cos  /?8), 

so  that  at  the  point  of  the  sun's  surface  from  which  the 
light  is  taken  the  direction-cosines  of  the  upward 
vertical  are 

(cos  ft,    cos&,    cos/33). 

Let  R  be  the  distance  from  the  molecule  at  (xlt  xz,  x3) 
to  the  centre  of  the  sun.  Then  after  differentiating  we 
can  put  a  for  R,  and  zero  for  x19xz,  x3. 


Then  A=(&+y?)  ...............  (8), 

where  0  <TJ  <-£-  .....................  (9). 

It  follows  from  equation  (22)  of  Chapter  vi  that  77 
would  be  exactly  %  if  the  sun  were  homogeneous.  But 
it  is  probably  considerably  smaller. 


Then       ^a  =        =  {2,  +  (l-3,)8in'A}       ...(10). 
Thus  =  I*4  {1+^  +  1(1-  3,)  sin'A}  ...(11). 


This  formula  exhibits  a  Limb  Effect.   For  if  the  light 
comes  from  the  centre  of  the  sun,  then 


and  =          (l+i,)  ............  (12); 

and  if  the  light  comes  from  the  edge  of  the  disc,  then 


(13). 


120  THE  LIMB  EFFECT  [CHXIV 

Hence,  as  we  proceed  from  the  sun's  centre  to  its 
rim,  there  is  a  shift  of  spectral  lines  towards  the  red, 
defined  by 


Thus,  if  we  take  77  =  ^ 

(which  is  probably  not  far  from  the  truth),  we  find 
&ivT        7 


It  is  unnecessary  to  point  out  the  roughness  of  the 
assumptions,  particularly  the  conception  of  the  molecule 
as  a  vibrating  doublet  emitting  light.  But  the  investi 
gation  does  suffice  to  show  that  our  general  assumptions 
do  require  the  existence  of  a  limb  effect  of  the  same 
order  and  sign  as  that  actually  observed. 


CHAPTER  XV 


PERMANENT  DIRECTIONS  OF  VIBRATION  AND 
THE  DOUBLING  EFFECT 

CONSIDER  a  vibrating  element  of  a  molecule  of  charge 
—  e',  the  charge  of  the  central  nucleus  being  e.  Let 
(PU  P2,  P3)  be  the  mechanical  force  on  the  element  due 
to  the  electrostatic  attraction  of  the  nucleus.  Then  [cf. 
equation  (8)  of  Chapter  xm] 


>     ee'x*  r 

*~        r3   1 


2ee' 


=  1,2,3] 


...(1). 


Let  this  element  of  the  molecule  be  that  element  whose 
radial  vibration  in  direction  (alt  a.2,  a3)  constitutes  the 
variable  doublet  to  which  the  radiation  of  the  light  is 
due.  This  direction  of  vibration  cannot  be  permanent 
unless  the  force  (P15  P2,  P3)  is  in  the  direction  (al9  a2,  a3), 
when 

x.  =  W.>  [5=1,2,3] (2). 

Hence  for  permanence  we  require 

V  4      n      rr*  n        [~e  —  1     9     3~l        f'l\ 
2*  Si^Ctp  OC  as,    [_.S  —  1,  <6,  OJ...^O^. 

/* 

Consider  a  molecule  in  the  atmosphere  of  the  sun  as 
in  the  previous  chapters.  Then  [cf.  equations  (8)  and 
(10)  of  Chapter  xi v] 

1 

<r     " 
1 


=  ~      -   ?    cos      cos    , .  - 


...(4). 


122  THE  DOUBLING  EFFECT  [CH 

Hence 

aM  =  —  ^-~  ^4  cos  fa  S'aM  cos  fa 


+    p*4as  .-(5). 
Hence 


aM  cos 
or 


Thus  a  permanent  direction  of  vibration  must  be  either 
normal  or  tangential  to  the  gravitational  level  surface. 

Accordingly,  in  the  gaseous  mass  of  molecules  forming 
the  atmosphere  of  the  sun  there  will  be  an  excess  of 
molecules  with  their  vibrations  either  normal  to  the 
level  surface  or  in  one  of  the  directions  tangential  to 
the  level  surface. 

First  consider  the  vibrations  normal  to  the  level 
surface,  and  as  in  the  previous  chapter  let  the  observer 
be  on  the  axis  of  xl  at  a  great  distance.  Then  for  these 
vibrations  we  should  put 

a,  =  cos&,  [*=!,  2,  3]  ......  (7). 

Thus  [cf.  equation  (4)  of  Chapter  xiv] 


t. 

-y*.  ..............  ••  ......................  ••••<»>• 

Thus  these  molecules  yield  a  constant  shift  of  the 
spectral  lines  all  over  the  sun's  disc.  But  the  intensity 
of  the  light  due  to  them  varies  as  sin2  /^  .  Accordingly, 


xv] 


THE  DOUBLING  EFFECT 


123 


they  should  yield  faint  lines  from  the  centre  of  the  disc 
and  comparatively  strong  lines  from  its  edge. 

Secondly,  consider  molecules  vibrating  tangentially  to 
the  sun's  gravitational  level  surface.  No  generality  is 
lost  by  taking  the  axes  of  x2  and  x3,  so  that  the  sun's 
diameter  through  the  point  of  the  disc  considered  is  in 
the  plane  x^.  In  this  case 

I-  -(9). 


Also  the  level  surface  at  the  point  contains  the  axis 
of  x3. 

x* 


Then  we  can  put 

«!  =  —  sin  9  sin  /3X  =  —  sin  8  cos  ft.2  * 

az  =  sin  0  cos  & 

a3  =  cos  0 
Hence  equation  (4)  of  Chapter  xiv  becomes 


...(10). 


T 


-  \  sina  0  (Au  cos2  ft  -  2An  cos  ft  cos  &  +  A*  cos2  ft) 
—  ^^33  cos2  0  —  sin  0  cos  0  (A^  cos  ft  —  ^431  cos  ft). 


124  THE  DOUBLING  EFFECT  [OH 

By  the  use  of  equations  (4)  of  this  chapter,  this 
reduces  to 


T  ~     2c*      4 

To  consider  the  comparative  brightness  of  light  from 
these  molecules  taken  at  different  points  [i.e.  for 
different  values  of  ft]  note  that  [cf.  equations  (10)  of 
this  chapter] 

sin2  a,  =  I  -  a,2  =  1  -  sin2  0  sin2  ft  ......  (12). 

Hence  the  total  light  from  this  type  of  molecule  is 
brightest  at  the  centre  of  the  disc  [ft  =  0],  since  for 
every  value  of  0 

sin2  ^=1  .....................  (13). 

The  brightness  falls  off  as  we  pass  towards  the  edge 

/  7T^ 

of  the  disc,  and  finally  at  the  edge  (  ft  =  - 


2 

sin2  ax  =  cos2  6 
Also  the  average  value  for  sin2  c^  at  any  point  is 

l-isin2ft (15). 

It  will  also  be  noticed  that  the  larger  angular  area 
of  an  equatorial  belt  of  angular  breadth  28^  over  a 
polar  cap  of  angular  diameter  28^  gives  the  tangential 
molecules  another  advantage  in  brightness  over  those 
of  the  former  type  vibrating  normally  to  the  level 
surface. 

To  sum  up  the  discussion  on  the  shift  of  the  spectral 
lines  contained  in  this  and  the  two  preceding  chapters  : 
The  molecules  in  the  sun's  atmosphere  can  be  sorted 
into  three  groups,  (i)  a  group  of  molecules  uniformly 
pointing  in  all  directions,  (ii)  a  group  of  molecules 
pointing  normally  to  the  gravitational  level,  and  (iii)  a 


xv]  THE  DOUBLING  EFFECT  125 

group  of  molecules  pointing  tangentially  to  the  gravi 
tational  level.  A  molecule  is  said  to  point  in  the 
direction  of  the  equivalent  electric  doublet  whose  varia 
tion  generates  the  light  waves. 

The  relative  brightness  of  the  light  from  these  three 
groups  changes  as  we  pass  from  the  centre  to  the  edge 
of  the  sun's  disc.  It  is  constant  for  group  (i),  it  varies 
as  sin2  ft  for  group  (ii),  and  it  varies  as  (l  —  ^  sin2  ft)  for 
group  (iii). 

The  spectral  shift  for  group  (i)  is  on  one  hypothesis 
[cf.  Chapter  xm] 

!_* 

6c°    4) 

and  on  another  hypothesis  [cf.  equation  (11)  of  Chap 
ter  xiv]  it  approximates  to 


where  77  is  probably  not  greater  than  ^Q. 
The  spectral  shift  for  group  (ii)  is 

3  ~  2rJ  «, 
~~2dr^4' 

The  spectral  shift  for  group  (iii)  is 

2_±2<p 

2c2 

Accordingly,  in  light  derived  from  the  sun,  or  a  star, 
or  a  nebula  in  (1)  a  general  shift  of  the  spectral  lines  to 
the  red  may  be  expected ;  (2)  since  groups  (ii)  and  (iii) 
change  in  relative  importance  as  we  pass  from  the 
centre  to  the  edge  of  the  disc,  and  since  the  shift  due 
to  group  (i)  also  changes,  so  a  shift  of  spectral  lines 
towards  the  red  (the  limb  effect)  may  be  expected ; 
(3)  in  the  case  of  the  sun  or  a  nebula  some  evidence  of 


126  THE  DOUBLING  EFFECT  [CH  xv 

a  doubling  or  even  a  trebling  of  the  spectral  lines  may 
be  expected. 

It  is  also  to  be  noticed  that  the  number  of  vibrations 
of  a  doublet  emitting  light  from  the  visible  spectrum 
during  a  mean  free  path  of  the  molecule  is  of  the  order 
104,  even  allowing  for  the  fact  that  the  velocity  of  the 
molecule  is  largely  due  to  a  high  temperature.  Accord 
ingly,  within  each  mean  free  path  there  is  time  for  the 
vibrations  to  settle  down  into  one  of  their  permanent 
directions. 

Finally,  we  note  that  when  it  shall  be  possible  to 
measure  with  reasonable  accuracy  the  spectral  shifts  of 
light  from  the  stars  and  the  nebulae,  we  obtain  a 
numerical  determination  for  the  mass  divided  by  the 
radius  of  the  body  concerned.  Hence  if  either  the 
mass  or  the  radius  be  known,  the  other  can  be  found. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

STEADY  ELECTROMAGNETIC  FIELDS 

THE  equations  (6)  of  Chapter  x  for  a  steady  electro 
magnetic  field  become 


y<y,  0=1,  2,  3]...(i). 

Consider  a  region  where  there  is  no  current  and  let 
F^  |>,  v=  1,  2,  3,  4]  be  the  value  of  F^  which  is  the 
first  approximation  when  the  gravitational  influence  is 
neglected. 

We  use  equations  (3)  to  (6)  of  Chapter  xm  and  put 


We  also  take  £1  as  the  magnetic  potential  for  the 
approximate  magnetic  force  (cFZ3°,  cF3l°,  cF^),  so  that 

(cFj,  cFJ,  cFJ)=  -gradft  .........  (3). 

The  equations  to  determine  the  magnetic  force 

(cF,,  cF3l,  cFK) 
now  become 

curl  (Si,  S,,  S,)  =  Q  ...............  (4), 

where 

an    2/dBdF°    dB3F4°\    /cx 
Si^cFv-VSfA+z-  +-U-^r-5-^r  —(5), 

dxv      C  \dx.,  dx2       dx.2  dx3  1 
with  analogous  meanings  for  £  and  >S3. 


128          STEADY  ELECTROMAGNETIC  FIELDS          [CH 

Hence  the  second  approximation  gives 
cF,  =  cFJ  -  2  {AucFa'  +  AacFJ  +  AacFj} 


-  ...(7), 


-  2  {  A«  cFJ  +  AxcF3?  +  A.cFj} 

_2M  35  .... 


In  the  first  place  we  note  that  a  steady  electric  force 
(Fu,  F^,FU)  in  a  permanent  gravitational  field  produces 
the  magnetic  force 


where  \_H.Rf~\  stands  for  the  vector  product  of  the  two 
vectors  R  and  Rf. 

Accordingly,  the  magnetic  force  is  perpendicular  to 
the  electric  force  which  produces  it  and  to  the  vector 
grad  B. 

Consider  a  field  on  the  surface  of  the  earth.  Let  a  be 
the  earth's  radius  and  let  the  axis  of  xl  be  the  upward 
vertical.  Then  at  the  origin  (which  is  on  the  earth's 
surface) 

grad£  =  (^4,  0,  o)    (9), 


where  [cf.  equation  (23)  of  Chapter  vi] 

076  ...  <e<l. 

Here  e  would  attain  its  lower  limit  if  the  earth  were 
uniform  throughout.  We  shall  assume 

e  =  0'88   (10) 


xvi]        STEADY  ELECTROMAGNETIC  FIELDS          129 

as   a   sufficient  approximation    in   the   actual  circum 
stances. 

Hence  the  magnetic  force  produced  by  the  electric 
force 

a,    Fsina,  0) 


is  ^.(0,0,  -sin  a), 

c/ 

i.e.  is  the  horizontal  force 

2ega  ^  . 
-~  Fsma, 
c 

perpendicular  to  the  vertical  plane  containing  the 
electric  force  and  proportional  to  the  sine  of  the  angle 
which  the  electric  force  makes  with  the  vertical.  Here 
g  denotes  the  ordinary  gravitational  acceleration. 

Accordingly,  a  given  electric  force  produces  the 
greatest  magnetic  effect  when  it  is  horizontal.  But  in 
any  case  the  magnetic  force  produced  is  extremely 
small,  being  about 

r2xlO~9x^sin  a    (gausses), 

where  F  is  the  measure  of  the  electric  force  in  electro 
static  units. 

The  corresponding  effect  on  the  surface  of  the  sun 
would  be  about 

3*8xlO~Bx^sinct   (gausses). 

This  effect  is  the  only  effect  I  have  found  which  depends 
on  the  existence  of  B.  Accordingly,  an  experiment  of 
sufficient  accuracy  to  detect  the  magnetic  force,  if  it 
exists,  would  be  of  great  interest  as  forming  a  crucial 
experiment  to  test  the  formula  for  dJ2  here  adopted. 

A  steady  magnetic  field  is  also  modified  by  the 
presence  of  the  gravitational  field. 

W.R.  9 


130 


STEADY  ELECTROMAGNETIC  FIELDS 


[CH 


For  example,  consider  a  current  /  (electromagnetic 
measure)  along  the  axis  of  xlt  and  let  R  be  the  distance 
of  (xlt  x.2,  x.d)  from  this  axis.  Then 


,(11). 


R 

Let  the  wire  (i.e.  the  axis  of  xt)  make  an  angle  ft  with 
the  upward  vertical,  and  let  the  axis  of  x2  lie  in  the 
vertical  plane  through  the  wire.  Also  let  the  plane 
through  the  wire  and  the  point  (xlt  x2,  x3)  make  an  angle 
<£  with  this  vertical  plane  through  the  wire.  Then  we 
find  [cf.  equations  (4)  of  Chapter  xv] 


AU  =  -  (1  -  817)  sin  ft  cos  ft .  - 
A»  =  Q 

Hence  [cf.  equation  (6)  above] 


...(12). 


c~  K 

Thus  there  is  a  small  magnetic  force  parallel  to  the  wire 
which  is  equal  to 

(l-3i))ga  .    n0      21 

—-12-    -  cos  (j>  sin  2ft  x  -p- 

G  s\i 

at  distance  R  from  the  wire. 

This  force  vanishes  if  the  wire  be  vertical  or  hori 
zontal  and  is  greatest  when  the  wire  is  inclined  at  an 
angle  of  45°  to  the  vertical.  Also  it  is  greatest  in  the 
vertical  plane  through  the  wire,  and  vanishes  in  the 
plane  through  the  wire  perpendicular  to  this  vertical 
plane. 


xvi]        STEADY  ELECTROMAGNETIC  FIELDS  131 

Thus  its  greatest  value  at  a  distance  R  from  the  wire 
&— ^ ,  and  cj>  =  0  or  TT\  is 

(l-3rj)ga      2/  / 

—jT    ~  x  R   (gausses). 

Hence,  taking  77  =  ^ ,  its  greatest  value  at  distance  R 
from  the  wire  is  about 

27 

£  x  10  9  x  -     (gausses). 


9—2 


CHAPTER  XVII 

THE  MOON'S  MOTION 

ASTRONOMICAL  tables,  which  depend  on  observations 
made  at  all  times  of  the  year,  must  finally  register 
spatio-temporal  elements  in  terms  of  the  space -time 
which  is  the  rest-system  of  the  sun.  We  must  therefore 
distinguish  between  relative  motion  and  difference 
motion  in  respect  to  a  given  space -time.  Thus  the 
relative  motion  of  the  moon  with  respect  to  the  earth 
is  the  motion  of  the  moon  in  the  earth's  rest-system  at 
the  moment  of  observation.  But  the  difference  motion 
of  the  moon  from  the  earth  in  the  sun's  rest-space  is  the 
vector  excess  of  the  motion  of  the  moon  over  that  of  the 
earth  reckoned  in  the  sun's  rest-space.  On  the  classical 
theory  of  a  unique  space  and  unique  time  difference 
motion  and  relative  motion  were  identical.  We  have  to 
treat  them  as  distinct  with  distinct  formulae.  It  is 
evident  that  astronomical  tables  for  the  moon  concern 
the  difference  motion  of  the  moon  from  the  earth  with 
respect  to  the  sun's  rest-system  of  space-time. 

Let  (xl}  x2,  x3,  x±)  be  the  coordinates  of  the  moon  at 
the  time  x4  with  respect  to  rectangular  coordinate 
axes  in  the  sun's  rest-space  with  the  sun  as  origin. 
Let  the  contemporary  [i.e.  at  the  same  sun-time  #4] 
coordinates  of  the  earth  be  (ql ,  q2,  q3).  We  now  take  the 
earth  as  a  moving  origin  in  the  x-  space  and  obtain 
the  difference  coordinates  for  the  moon,  referred  to 
moving  axes  parallel  to  the  fixed  axes  (ylt  y2,  ya),  where 

&-*,-&,   |>  =  l,2,3] (1); 

also  the  difference  coordinates  for  the  sun  referred  to 


CH  xvii]  THE  MOON'S  MOTION  133 

the  earth  as  moving  origin  are  (  —  qlt  —  <?2,  — <?3),  where 
the  three  positions  in  the  sun's  rest-space  for  the  sun, 
earth  and  moon  are  contemporary  at  the  time  xt. 

The  difference  velocity  of  the  moon  from  the  earth  is 
therefore  (yl9y9,y3). 

Let  v  be  the  magnitude  of  the  velocity  of  the  moon 
in  the  sun's  rest-space,  and  let  U  be  the  velocity  of  the 
earth  in  the  same  space.  Also  let  F  be  the  magnitude 
of  the  difference  velocity  of  the  moon  from  the  earth. 
Then 

v*=  F2  +  Z72  +  22'?/M^   (2). 

Also  we  write 


s  x> 

Assume  a  uniplanar  motion  in  the  plane  of  the 
ecliptic,  so  that 

*3  =  0,    23  =  0,    2/3  =  0  ...............  (4). 

Let  (Rs,  ra)  be  the  polar  coordinates  of  the  earth 
relatively  to  the  sun,  and  let  (R19  R3)  be  the  polar 
difference-coordinates  of  the  moon  from  the  earth.  Thus 


yl  =  R,  cos  ^3,  yt  =  R,  sin 


134  THE  MOON'S  MOTION  [CH 

Also  let  ra  be  the  distance  of  the  moon  from  the 

sun,  so  that 

r*  =  R*  +  ^  +  2^11,  cos  Pa    .........  (6), 

where  p*  =  R*-r*  ..............................  (7). 

We  consider  R8  and  r3  to  be  given  functions  of  the 
time  Xi,  and  take  J?,  and  R3  as  the  coordinates  to  be 
determined  in  terms  of  the  time  by  means  of  the 
equations  of  motion.  Two  propositions  (A  and  B)  are 
easily  proved,  of  which  particular  cases  are  important  : 
Prop.  (A) 

' 


The  important  particular  case  of  this  proposition  is 

AJL^-JL^o  (9) 

dx.dR.r,      dR,r, 


Prop.  (£) 

jLJ^(r»r)  —  L(r«ri)  =  0  .........  (10). 


The  important  particular  case  is 


"' 


Let  (_p15  _p2,  _p3,  jp4)  be  the  coordinates  of  the  ante 
cedent  position  of  the  earth  causally  correlated  to  the 
moon's  position  at  time  x4,  referred  to  the  fixed  axes 
origin  at  the  sun. 

Let  re  be  the  distance  between  the  moon  and  this 
antecedent  position.  Also  put 

t*  -L   . i  *   /  \      . 


-i 


.(12). 


XVIl] 


THE  MOON'S  MOTION 


135 


Then  the  potential  impetus  of  the  moon's  route  through 
the  space-time  manifold  is  [cf.  equations  (1)  and  (3) 
of  Chapter  vi]  determined  by 


dJ*  =  (c2  -  v*)  dx?  - 8    l  -  -    dx- 


where  ms  and  me  are  the  masses  of  the  sun  and  earth 
respectively. 
We  now  put 


Thus 
Also 

Hence 


+  terms  due  to  planetary  attraction  (14). 

(15). 


(17). 


c"    i\ 


where 


+  ~^TL+     cR, 


...(18), 


We  put 

wl  =  Rs  cos  p3  +  Rsr3  sin 
2  =  Rsr3  cos  p.A  —  Rs  sin 


^^(R,-  Rsr*)  cos  p3  +  (Rsr3  +  2Rsr 3)  sin  p3 
,r3)  cos  yo3  -  (R3  -  Rsr?)  sin  />3  j 


....(20). 


136  THE  MOON'S  MOTION  [CH  xvii 

Then  w^w^a^,  a.2  are  functions  of  RA  and  x4  only.    Also 


(21). 

Thus 

TT     yme  r-f.  &         -, 

±±e  =  -^n\^K^^^U 


.........  (22). 

There  are  now  [cf.  equation  (6)  of  Chapter  v]  two 
equations  of  motion  of  the  type 


(23). 

It  follows  from  the  special  cases  of  Props.  (A)  and 
(B),  that  the  two  terms  involving  c~l  as  a  factor  dis 
appear  in  both  equations.  Hence  these  equations  both 
take  the  form  [ft  =  1,  3], 

d  az     az      d    d 


dx^R^  <?rl 


The  terms  on  the  left-hand  side  of  these  equations 
are  those  introduced  by  ordinary  lunar  theory ;  the 
terms  on  the  right-hand  side  are  the  new  small  cor 
rections  introduced  by  the  formulae  of  relativity  of  the 
form  here  adopted.  I  have  not  succeeded  in  eliciting 
any  terms  which,  in  the  present  state  of  the  Lunar 
Tables,  can  be  made  the  subject  of  comparison  with 
observation.  The  investigation  will  therefore  not  be 
pursued  further. 


PART  III 

ELEMENTARY  THEORY  OF  TENSORS 


CHAPTER  XVIII 

FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS 

1.  Coordinates.  The  mutual  relations  to  each 
other  of  event-particles  can  be  determined  by  charac 
terising  each  event-particle  by  four  measurements  of 
four  assigned  types  respectively.  These  four  measure 
ments  are  called  the  coordinates  of  the  event-particle  ; 
and  the  four  types  of  measurement  must  be  such  that 
(i)  each  type  assigns  to  each  event-particle  one  and 
only  one  coordinate  of  that  type,  and  (ii)  each  set  of 
four  coordinates  (as  ordered  in  that  assignment  to 
types)  characterises  one  and  only  one  event-particle. 
Four  given  types  of  measurement  with  these  properties 
are  called  a  coordinate-system. 

A  coordinate-system  will  be  called  '  pure '  if  one  of 
the  coordinates  be  the  time  of  some  given  space -time 
system  '  x '  and  the  other  three  coordinates  be  spatial- 
quantities  of  the  space  of  the  same  system  '  x"  A  co 
ordinate-system  which  is  not  pure  is  called  '  mixed.' 
If  (u19  u.2,  u9,  u4)  be  the  coordinates  of  an  event-particle 
in  a  pure  system,  then  it  will  be  adopted  as  a  conven 
tion  that  (u19  uZ9  ua)  represent  the  spatial  coordinates 
of  a  point  in  the  space  of  the  space-time  system  to 
which  the  coordinates  refer  and  u*  represents  the  time 
in  the  same  space-time  system.  Thus  the  event-particle 
(ul9  u2,  u3,  u4)  happens  at  the  time  u4  and  at  the  point 
(ul9  u2,  u3)  in  the  corresponding  space. 

If  (u^  uz,  u3,  u^)  and  (xl9  x2,  xS9  x4)  be  the  coordi 
nates  of  the  same  event-particles  according  to  different 


140  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS  [OH 

coordinate-systems,  the  w-system  and  the  ^-system 
respectively,  then  there  will  be  four  equations  of  trans 
formation 

^=/M(»I»  x-2>  xs>  x^  [/*=!>  2>   3,   4]     ...(1). 

These  four  equations  can  be  solved  so  as  to  give 

*>  =  ^K>  u*>  u*>  *0>  [>=1>  2>  3>  41  — (I'l). 
If  both  systems  are  pure  in  the  same  space-time 
system,  then 

u,  =  x,, 

and  (ult  uz,  us)  and  (x19  xz,  x3)  are  different  spatial  co 
ordinates  of  the  same  point  in  the  space  of  that  space- 
time  system. 

2.  Scalar  Characters  and  Invariant  Expressions. 
Consider  the  measurement  of  some  physical  quantity 
arising  in  the  physical  field  at  an  event-particle,  such 
as  the  gravitational  potential  according  to  some  definite 
meaning  of  that  term.  Its  measure  (so  far  as  the  defini 
tion  of  meaning  is  kept  unchanged)  must  be  indepen 
dent  of  coordinate-systems.  But  its  law  of  distribution 
throughout  the  various  event-particles  of  space-time 
will  be  expressible  as  a  function  of  the  coordinates  of 
the  event-particles  under  consideration. 

Such  a  physical  character  is  called  a  scalar  quantity. 

We  must  distinguish  between  a  scalar  quantity 
and  an  invariant  formula  expressing  that  quantity. 
When  a  formula  in  terms  of  coordinates  of  relevant 
event-particles  is  such  that  it  gives  the  same  value  for 
the  scalar  quantity  whatever  coordinate-system  be 
employed,  it  is  called  an  invariant  formula.  There 
may  also  be  formulae  which  are  only  invariant  for  a 
limited  set  of  systems  of  coordinates,  derivable  one 
from  the  other  by  transformations  forming  a  group  (in 


xvm]  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS  141 

the  mathematical  sense  of  that  term).    In  this  limited 
case  we  have  l  group  invariance/ 

When  we  can  conceive  a  scalar  character  in  such  a 
way  that  it  has  no  special  or  peculiar  relation  of  any 
sort  to  one  coordinate-system  of  a  group  which  it  has 
not  to  any  other  system  of  that  group,  it  follows  that 
there  must  be  some  group-invariant  formula  for  the 
scalar  character  which  is  limited  to  that  group  of 
systems  of  coordinates. 

3.  Physical  Characters  of  the  First  Order.  A  scalar 
character  is  a  character  of  zero  order. 

A  character  of  event-particles  is  of  the  first  order 
when  —  given  any  coordinate  -system  (ult  uz,  u3,  u^)  —  it  is 
expressible  by  an  array  of  four  quantities  (functions  of 
the  coordinates  of  the  event-particles  in  question)  such 
that  each  quantity  is  specially  related  to  one  of  the 
types  of  coordinate  measurement.  These  four  quantities 
are  called  the  '  components  '  of  that  character  for  that 
coordinate-system. 

For  example,  let  (ult  u39  UB,  u4)  be  a  pure  coordinate- 
system,  and  let  a  region  of  the  it-space  be  filled  with  a 
continuously  moving  substance.  Let  the  motion  of  the 
substance  at  (ult  u.2,  u3)  at  the  time  u±  be  represented  by 


Thus  the  array  (ulf  ut9  u3,  1)  represents  a  character  of  the 
first  order  which  is  descriptive  of  the  motion  of  the  fluid. 
Again,  let  <X>  be  the  gravitational  potential  at  the 
event-particle  (ul9  u2,  u3,  w4).    Then  the  gradient 


represents  a  character  of  the  first  order. 


142  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS  [CH 

Let  (x19  xz,  x3,  x4)be  the  coordinates  in  the  coordinate- 
system  '  x  '  of  the  same  event-particle  as  denoted  by 
(uly  uZ9  HS,  Ut).  Then  (xlt  x2J  xa>  1)  is  a  character  of  the 
first  order  descriptive  of  the  motion  by  reference  to  the 
coordinate-system  '  x.'  We  are  at  once  brought  to  the 
consideration  of  the  relations  to  each  other  of  these  two 
distinct  descriptions  of  the  same  fact  of  motion  by 
means  of  (ult  uz,  u3,  1)  and  (xlt  x2)  x3,  1)  respectively. 

The  relations  between  the  two  will  be  peculiarly 
simple  (and  therefore  important)  if  the  components  of 
one  character  (say  the  'M-character)  are  expressible  as 
linear  functions  of  the  components  of  the  other  character 
(the  x-character),  where  the  coefficients  may  be  functions 
of  the  coordinates  of  the  event-particles  in  question 
which  are  purely  determined  by  the  general  relations 
of  the  two  coordinate  -systems  in  question  and  are 
independent  of  the  particular  values  of  the  components. 
Thus  if  (7V10,  T*(u\  T™,  T4(u))  be  a  first  order  description 
of  some  fact  in  coordinate-system  '  u,'  and 


be  a  description  of  the  same  fact  in  coordinate-system 
'  x,'  the  desired  linear  relation  is 


where  the  coefficients  ZMa  [//,,  a  =  1,  2,  3,  4]  are  expressible 
in  terms  of  the  equations  of  transformation  between 
6u'  and  'x'  without  any  reference  to  the  particular 
values  of 


4.  Tensors  of  the  First  Order.  Furthermore,  we 
pass  from  the  two  assigned  coordinate-systems  '  u  '  and 
1  x  '  to  the  consideration  of  a  group  of  systems  (as  in 
the  case  of  invariance),  if  the  determination  of  the 


xvm]  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS  H3 

coefficients  [i.e.  ZMJ  can  be  fixed  by  a  general  rule  which 
is  identical  for  any  two  systems  of  the  group. 

A  first  order  character  as  thus  described  in  any 
coordinate-system  of  a  group  is  called  a  'Group-Tensor ' 
for  that  group. 

If  the  general  rule  for  the  formation  of  coefficients 
in  the  linear  relation  between  the  components  hold  for 
all  pairs  of  coordinate-systems  whatsoever,  then  the 
character  as  thus  described  in  all  coordinate-systems  is 
called  a  'General  Tensor'  or  more  simply  a  *  Tensor.' 
It  is  a  tensor  of  the  first  order. 

It  is  obvious  that  in  the  case  of  a  group-tensor  or 
a  general  tensor  the  rule  for  the  formation  of  the 
coefficients  in  the  linear  equations  giving  the  com 
ponents  of  the  character  for  one  coordinate-system  in 
terms  of  the  components  for  another  coordinate-system 
must  be  such  that  the  transformations  of  components 
from  one  system  to  another  form  a  group.  For  there  is 
to  be  only  one  description  of  the  character  in  each  co 
ordinate-system.  Accordingly,  if '  u,'  'v,'  'x'  be  three 
coordinate-systems  and  '  J"  a  tensor  character,  then  the 
transformation  of 

(T™,  T?\  T3(w),  T™)  to  (T*\  T?\  T*\  I") 
and  then  of 

(T™,  ZV",  Tf\  r4w)  to  (T™,  T*\  T™,  T^) 

must  give  the  same  components  in  system  '  x '  as  the 
direct  transformation  from  system  '  u '  to  system  'x.' 
In  future  we  will  write 

||  7""  || 

for  the  array  of  the  components  of  a  character  in 
system  ( u.' 


144  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS  [CH 

5.  Covariant  and  Contravariant  First  -Order 
Tensors.  A  tensor  may  refer  to  many  event-particles. 
Suppose  that  one  of  these  with  a  peculiar  definite 
relation  to  the  character  in  question  is  picked  out  and 
termed  the  dominant  event-particle  of  the  character. 
Let  ||  T(u)  ||  be  the  tensor  in  system  'u*  and  ||  T(x)\\  be 
the  tensor  in  system  '  x,J  and  let  (ult  u2,  u3,  u^)  and 
(xl9  x2)x3,  x±)  be  the  coordinates  of  the  dominant  event- 
particle  of  the  character  expressed  by  the  tensor. 

The  tensor  is  '  covariant  '  if  its  components  in  any 
system  '  u  '  are  related  to  its  components  in  any 
system  e  x*  by 

n^Fff^,  [/*=!,  2,  3,4]...(3). 

In  the  case  of  contravariant  tensors  it  is  convenient 
to  adopt  an  alternative  notation  (T(u)\  T(u)\  T(u)\  T(uf)  for 
the  components  in  any  system  '  u9  shortened  into  ||  T(u)  || 
when  the  whole  array  is  to  be  mentioned. 

Then  a  tensor  is  '  contravariant  '  if  its  components  in 
any  system  *  u  '  are  related  to  its  components  in  any 
system  '  x  '  by 


It  is  easy  to  prove  the  '  group'  property  of  the  co 
variant  and  contravariant  modes  of  transformation  by 
the  use  of  the  equations 


.  ,    (5-1)- 

=  1,      [p  =  V_    _ 

If  the  tensor  property  is  restricted  to  a  group  of 


xvin]  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS  145 

systems  of  coordinates,  we  obtain  covariant  group- 
tensors  or  contravariant  group-tensors  as  the  case 
may  be. 

6.  Characters  and  Tensors  of  Higher  Orders. 
A  physical  character  is  of  the  nth  order  when,  in  any 
coordinate  system  '  u,'  it  is  expressible  by  an  array  of 
4M  quantities  (functions  of  the  coordinates  of  the  event- 
particles  in  question)  so  that  each  component  of  the 
array  is  specially  related  to  one  permutation  of  the 
types  of  coordinate  measurement,  the  types  being  taken 
n  together  in  each  permutation  and  repetitions  of  type 
being  allowed. 

Thus  a  character  of  the  2nd  order  will  require  the 
array 

T™,   [^=1,2,3,4]. 

For  example,  those  seven  components  (out  of  the 
whole  sixteen)  which  involve  the  coordinate-type  'u^  are 

/TT(«)       /TT(U)       /rr(«)       rp(u)       rp(u)       /TT(W)       /TF(w) 
•*•  11   J      •*•  12   >      •*•  21   >      •*•  13   »      -*•  31  >      •*  14   J      -1  41   ' 

A  character  of  the  3rd  order  will  involve  64  com 
ponents,  and  of  the  4th  order  256  components. 

The  same  general  explanations,  mutatis  mutandis, 
apply  as  in  the  case  of  characters  of  the  1st  order. 

The  covariant  tensor  transformation  (for  the  2nd 
order)  is 


and  the  contravariant  tensor  transformation  (for  the 
2nd  order)  is 

OU 


and  analogously  for  characters  of  other  orders. 

w.  B.  10 


146  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS  [OH 

But  '  mixed  '  tensors  now  appear  in  which  both  co- 
variant  and  contra  variant  qualities  are  involved. 

For  example,  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  2nd  order  [repre 
sented  by  the  notation  T*(u)  for  coordinate-system  '^'] 
is  transformed  by  the  rule 

x)d^d^  ............  (7), 

' 


and  analogously  for  higher  orders. 

7.  Tensor-Invariance  of  Formulae.  The  tensor 
description  of  a  physical  character  must  not  be  confused 
with  the  tensor-invariance  for  mathematical  formulae. 
If  the  array  ||  T^M  \\  be  an  array  of  formulae  involving 
the  ^-coordinates  (u19  u2,  us,  u4)  as  arguments,  then 
these  formulae  have  tensor-covariance  if  HJ^H,  as 
obtained  from  ||  T£u)  ||  by  the  co  variant  rule  of  trans 
formation,  are  expressible  by  the  same  formulae  in 
volving  (x19  x.2,  x3,  x4)  as  ||  TJU]\\  are  expressed  by  the 
use  of  (ul}  u2,  u3,  u4).  Also  similarly  for  tensor-contra- 
variance. 

Thus  tensor-invariance  (as  this  property  will  be 
termed)  implies  the  persistence  of  the  same  formulae 
after  transference  from  one  coordinate-system  to  another 
by  means  of  the  appropriate  tensor  formula  (covariant 
or  contra  variant). 

For  example,  if  A  be  any  function  of  the  position 
of  the  event-particle  (ult  u2,  us,  ut),  then  the  array 


has  tensor-covariance.    For 

cL4=scL4.a^  , 

dUp      «  dxadulli  "  '*\  /• 

Again  let  dN  be  any  homogeneous  rational  integral 


xvm]  FUNDAMENTAL  NOTIONS  147 

function  of  du^  duz,  du3,  du^  of  the  first  degree,  and  thus 
analogously  expressible  in  any  coordinate-system.  Also 

write 

idN 


where  ult  u3,  u3  represent  the  definite  velocity  of  a 
substance  at  (uiy  u9,  u3)  at  time  w4.    Then 

(N(u}ult  W»u,,  N(u}u3,  NM)  .........  (8-1) 

has  tensor-contravariance,  since 


It  is  evident  that  the  formulae  expressing  a  law  of 
nature  which  is  not  known  to  have  any  particular 
relation  to  the  coordinate-systems  in  question  should 
have  tensor-in  variance. 


10—2 


CHAPTER  XIX 

ELEMENTARY  PROPERTIES 

8.  Test  for  Tensor  Property.  If  an  array  character 
possess  the  tensor  property  (covariant,  contra  variant, 
or  mixed)  for  transference  from  one  given  coordinate- 
system  to  every  other  coordinate-system,  then  it 
possesses  it  in  general,  namely  for  transference  from 
any  system  to  any  other  system.  For  let  tut  be  the 
given  coordinate-system  and  let  *  p  '  and  '  q  '  be  any 
other  coordinate-systems.  As  an  example  consider  the 
mixed  tensor  ||  $/  ||.  Then  by  hypothesis 


(9-1). 


O  ^ 

Multiply  equation  (9'1)  by   ~  ^  and  sum  for  p 

cua  cq^j. 

and  cr.    [Note  that  in  future  this  type  of  operation 

will  be  described  as  '  operating  with  2S  ~  —  -*.'! 

p  *  dua  dqv 

Then  [cf.  equations  (5)  and  (5*1)] 


CH  xix]  ELEMENTARY  PROPERTIES  149 

Hence  substituting  in  equation  (9)  for  Saft  (u) 


This  proves  the  required  property. 

9.  Sum  of  Tensors.   If  ||  S  \\  and  ||  T\\  are  two  tensors 
of  the  same  order  and  type,  then  ||  S+  T\\  and  ||  S-  T\\ 
are  tensors  of  that  same  order  and  type.    The  proof  is 
obvious. 

Again,  if  every  component  of  a  tensor  vanishes  in  one 
coordinate-system,  the  same  property  holds  in  every 
coordinate- system. 

It  therefore  follows  that  if  ||  S||  and  ||  T\\  are  tensors 
of  the  same  order  and  type  and  their  corresponding 
components  are  equal  in  one  coordinate-system,  they  are 
equal  in  every  coordinate-system.  This  is  the  principle 
of  tensor-equations. 

10.  Product  of  Tensors.  Let  ||  S  \\  be  a  tensor  of  the 
rath  order  and  ||  T\\  a  tensor  of  the  nth  order.   Form  a 
new  array  of  the  (m  +  n)th  order  whose  components  are 
the  products  of  any  component  of  \\S\\  with  any  com 
ponent  of  ||  T\\.    This  new  array  is  a  tensor  with  the 
covariant  and  contravariant  affixes  of  both  tensors. 

As  an  example,  let  ||  S^  \\  be  a  covariant  tensor  of  the 
1st  order  and  ||  Tvp  \\  be  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  2nd  order. 
We  have  then  to  prove  that  ||  S^Tf  \\  is  a  mixed  tensor 
of  the  3rd  order  for  which  p,  and  v  are  the  covariant 
affixes  and  p  is  the  contravariant  affix. 


150  ELEMENTARY  PROPERTIES  [CH 

For  S»  =  SS<«%, 


Hence        Su(u}Tvp(u)-- 

V      '  a  J3  y  '    QU^  OUV  CXy 

This  proves  the  proposition.    An  analogous  proof  holds 
for  any  other  types  of  tensors. 

11.  Representation  of  a  Tensor  as  a  Sum  of 
Products. 

Case  (i).  If  ||  T^v  \\  be  any  covariant  tensor  of  the 
2nd  order,  then  four  pairs  of  covariant  tensors  of  the 
1st  order  can  be  found,  namely 

||-4M||  and  ||-4/||,     ||J?M||  and  ||J?/||, 
||C;  ||  and  ||(7;||,     ||Zy  and  ||Z>/||, 
such  that 

T^ApAJ  +  B^BS+CpCr'  +  D^DJ  ...(10). 
For  by  sections  9  and  1 0  the  left-hand  side'is  a  tensor 
of  the  right  order  and  type.  Hence,  again  by  section  9, 
we  have  only  to  choose  A,  A',  etc.,  so  that  in  one  co 
ordinate-system  the  components  of  the  composite  system 
are  equal  to  the  components  of  T. 

Consider  the  coordinate-system  lu.'  In  thisjsystem  let 

A^T^,  0=1,2,3,4], 


Then  ^  =  A^Al  +  B&  + .. . ,  O  =  L  2,;3,  4]. 

Also  let         _#„  =  T^,  O  =  1,  2,  3,  4], 


xix]  ELEMENTARY  PROPERTIES  151 

Then  T^  =  A^Aj  +  B^BJ  +  .  .  .  ,  [>  =  1  ,  2,  3,  4]. 

Also  treat  T^  and  T^  in  the  same  way,  so  that 

C^T^  [,.=  1,2,3,4] 
and  D;=ZU  [     „       „      ]. 

Hence  in  the  '  u  '  system 

T^=  A  f  A.'  +£&+..  .  +  ..., 

and  hence  the  equality  holds  in  every  system. 

This  proof  will  hold  equally  well  for  contra  variant  or 
mixed  terms  of  the  2nd  order. 

Case  (ii).  A  tensor  of  any  type  and  of  the  3rd  order 
can  be  exhibited  as  a  sum  of  products  of  four  pairs  of 
tensors,  one  tensor  in  each  pair  being  of  the  2nd  order 
and  one  of  the  1st  order. 

For  example,  consider  the  mixed  tensor  ||  T*v\\. 

We  can  find  four  pairs  of  tensors, 

Ap,  and  Ap,  B^  and  Bp,   C^  and  Cp,  D^  and  Dp, 
such  that 

TI=A^A>+B^B>+...  +  .........  (11). 

For  as  before  we  have  merely  to  obtain  the  equality 
in  one  coordinate-system.  Now  take  in  coordinate- 

system  'Uy 

ATl,  0,^=1,2,3,4], 


=Tl,  O,v=l,2,3,4], 


=Tl,  O,v=l,2,3,4], 


152  ELEMENTARY  PROPERTIES  [OH  xix 

#M,=  Z£,  [>,!>  =  1,2,  3,  4], 


The  theorem  is  now  proved. 

It  is  obvious  that  this  mode  of  representation  can  be 
proved  successively  for  tensors  of  any  order  or  type. 


CHAPTER  XX 

THE  PROCESS  OF  RESTRICTION 

1  2.  Definition  of  Restriction.  Let  S;;;p(u)  be  a  tensor 
of  any  order,  with  p  as  a  covariant  affix,  and  otherwise 
of  any  type.  Let  T"-p(u)  be  a  tensor  of  any  order,  with 
p  as  a  contravariant  affix  and  otherwise  of  any  type. 
Then  the  array  ^(u)  T;-(u) 

P 

will  be  proved  to  be  a  tensor.  It  will  be  called  a 
'restricted  product'  of  the  two  tensors  \\S\\  and  ||  T\\. 
The  order  of  the  restricted  product  will  obviously  be  two 
less  than  the  sum  of  the  orders  of  ||  S\\  and  ||  T\\. 

In  the  proof  we  will  take  the  two  tensors  S^p  (u)  and 
!<„),  but  it  will  be  obvious  that  the  steps  of  the  proof 
are  absolutely  general. 

We  have    S 


TSe    u«   v"       ?   Uf>   vp 

±  tu\   —  —    r  —  _  —  -  2i  T  —  r  - 

l)  dv^  duy  3u8  P  dvp  due 


Hence 

*SV  M  Tx* 

Z<O  D\  U  I  J.  fv\ 

p 
Hence  [cf.  equation  (5'1)  of  Chapter  xvm] 


This  proves  the  required  tensor  property,  and  an  analo 
gous  proof  is  obviously  applicable  to  all  analogous  cases. 

13.  Multiple  Restriction.  The  analogous  process  of 
restriction  can  be  applied  for  two  or  more  pairs  of  con 
trasted  indices  [i.e.  one  index  covariant  and  the  other 
contravariant].  The  multiply  restricted  product  thus 
obtained  will  still  be  a  tensor.  If  there  be  n  processes 
of  restrictive  summation  and  m  be  the  sum  of  the 


154  THE  PKOCESS  OF  KESTKICTION  [OH 

orders  of  the  two  tensors  \\S\\  and  \\T\\,  the  order  of 
the  multiply  restricted  tensor  will  be  m  —  2n. 

To  prove  the  tensor  property,  take  as  an  example 


Now  in  equation  (ll'l)  above  put 
X=S/A  =  <JT, 

and  sum  for  cr.   Then  [cf.  equation  (5*1)] 


JJ    (H-2). 

14.  Invariant  Products.  If  the  two  tensors  subject 
to  restriction  are  of  the  same  order  n,  and  there  be  n-fold 
restriction,  the  order  of  the  restricted  product  is  zero, 
so  that  it  is  an  invariant  scalar  quantity.   For  example, 

and  Z^TZ^ZS^TM      (12'1), 

ft  a 

and  22  S/  (v)  Tf  (v)  =  22  Saft  (u)  Tf  (u) 

(12-2). 

15.  The  Tensor  ||  /||.  Let  //be  defined  in  reference 
to  a  given  coordinate-system  'u'  by 

-J/=o, 


~wi  ^y^ (13). 

Consider  the  mixed  tensor  ||  1*  (v)  \\  whose  com 
ponents  in  the  system  '  u '  are  equal  to  those  of  the 
array  ||//||.  Then 

T vl    \—^  TpdUa  dVy 
=  V  g^q  dv>> 

=  ^/."....a (13-1). 


xx]  THE  PROCESS  OF  RESTRICTION  155 

Hence  //  has  the  same  relation  to  every  coordinate- 
system  as  that  which  it  has  to  coordinate-system  '  u.' 

16.     Restriction   of  a  Single  Mixed  Tensor.    It 

follows  from  the  theory  of  restriction  that 


is  a  tensor,  i.e. 


is  a  tensor.  Accordingly  the  mixed  tensor  of  the  3rd  order 

II  Tl  (u)  || 

has  been  restricted  into  a  tensor  of  the  1st  order.  This 
proof  is  obviously  quite  general.  For  example,  if  ||  Tj  || 
be  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  2nd  order,  then 


is  invariant. 

17.   Argument  from  Products  [Restricted  or  Un 

restricted]  to  the  Tensor  Property. 

This  argument  is  best  shown  by  a  series  of  examples  : 
Case  (i).    If  ||  T^  ||  be  an  array  of  components,  of  the 

1st  order,  defined  for  every  coordinate-system,  and  if, 

whatever  Ist-order  contra  variant  tensor  [|  S*  \\  may  be, 

we  have  the  invariance  of 

S  T  («)  fift 
2<J.p     0(tt), 

then  ||  T^  \\  is  a  covariant  tensor.    For  by  hypothesis 
v  T(v)    (>  —?(u)a 


and  fife 

Hence  S    T™  -  2  T™  .—  pl  S('u}  =  0. 

P  OMaJ 


156  THE  PROCESS  OF  RESTRICTION  [OH 

But  the  tensor  ||  <S"  ||  is  arbitrary.    Now  make  four  suc 
cessive  choices 

8^=1,  SW2  =  0,  Sw«  =  0,  £,„,<  =  0, 
and  SMl  =  0,  SM'=1,  SMS  =  0,  SM'=0, 
and  SM>  =  0,  SM2=0,  Sw*=l,  S^=0, 
and  ^.,'  =  0,  £,„,•=  0,  SM'  =  0,  Sw'=l, 
and  substitute  successively  in  the  above  equation.  We 
obtain 

np  («)  _  5*  np  (v)  v^p 
>     '    8«.' 

Hence  operating  with  S*,  we  obtain 


Thus[cf.  section  8]  the  required  tensor  property  is  proved. 

Secondly,  it  is  evident  that  if  the  arbitrary  tensor 
||  Sp  ||  had  been  co  variant,  then  ||  T*  ||  would  have  been 
contravariant. 

Case  (ii).  If  ||  T^  \\  be  an  array  of  components,  of  the 
2nd  order,  defined  for  every  coordinate-system,  and 
if,  whatever  Ist-order  contravariant  tensor  ||  Sv  \\  may 
be,  the  restricted  product 


is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  1st  order,  then  ||  T^v  ||  is  a 
co  variant  tensor  of  the  2nd  order.     For  by  hypothesis 


anrl  ^  7*v)  Sp  —  V  TV  T(u)  ^a  lf* 

sr^M=|[|r/(.s(.j^-. 

Hence  by  substituting  from  the  former  into  the  latter 
equation 


xx]  THE  PROCESS  OF  RESTRICTION  157 

Thus,  as  in  Case  (i),  by  suitable  choices  for  ||  >SP  ||J  the 
tensor  property  is  proved. 

An  analogous  theorem  holds  in  which  invariance  and 
contravariance  are  interchanged,  or  in  which  the  array 
||  T\\  is  proved  to  be  a  mixed  tensor. 

Case  (iii).  If  ||  T^v  \\  be  an  array  of  components,  of 
the  2nd  order,  defined  for  every  coordinate-system,  and 
if,  whatever  2nd-order  contra  variant  tensor  ||  £M"  ||  may 
be,  the  restricted  product 

||  2  Z^  |l 

is  a  mixed  tensor  of  the   2nd  order,  then  the  array 
||  T^  ||  is  a  co  variant  tensor  of  the  2nd  order. 
For  by  hypothesis 


/..v 


Hence  operating  with  2^*,  we  deduce 

p  vv 


Also  by  hypothesis 


)Ua  nfiyV,, 

^  -  -^  Mw)  ^  — 


p    |_a  Y 

Thus 


Hence,  as  above,  the  tensor  property  follows.  Analogous 
theorems  follow  for  suitable  interchanges  of  the  covariant 
and  invariant  types. 


158  THE  PROCESS  OF  RESTRICTION  [OH 

Case  (iv).  If  ||  T^v  \\  be  an  array  of  components,  of  any 
order,  denned  for  every  coordinate-system,  and  if,  what 
ever  Ist-order  co  variant  tensor  \\S^\\  may  be,  the  product 
||$AjTMJ/||  is  a  co  variant  tensor  of  the  3rd  order,  then 
||  T^  ||  is  a  co  variant  tensor  of  the  2nd  order. 

For  by  hypothesis 


Also  by  hypothesis 


Hence  from  both  equations 

[rr,(v]         yy  rwi(u)  <^/3  ^y        O  (v)  _  rv 
/"f7>l*8^8 


Hence,  by  suitable  choices  for  the  arbitrary  tensor 
||  SK(V)  ||,  the  tensor  property  for  ||  T(^  ||  is  proved. 

Analogous  theorems  can  be  proved  for  any  suitable 
interchanges  of  covariance  and  contra  variance  of  type. 

General  Theorem.  If  the  product,  restricted  (multiply 
or  singly)  or  unrestricted,  of  an  array,  of  any  order 
and  defined  for  every  coordinate-system,  with  every 
arbitrary  tensor  of  any  one  definite  type  and  order  be 
a  tensor  [of  suitable  type  and  order]  ,  then  the  array  is 
a  tensor  [of  suitable  type  and  order]. 

It  is  evident  that  the  types  of  proof  given  above  for 
the  four  special  cases  can  be  adapted  for  every  case  of 
this  general  theorem. 

1  8  .   Differential  Forms  .   Since 


it  follows  that 

\\dv  J|,  and  ||  dv  dvv  ||,  and  ||  dvkdv^dvv  ||,  etc., 


xx]  THE  PROCESS  OF  RESTRICTION  159 

are  contravariant  tensors  of  the   1st,   2nd,   3rd,  etc., 
orders  respectively.  V 

Hence  if  ||  F^  \\  be  a  co  variant  tensor 


is  invariant.    We  adopt  the  notation 

dF^ZF^du^   ...............  (14). 

Then  dF  is  a  differential  form  of  the  1st  order. 
Similarly  if  ||  S^v  ||  be  a  co  variant  tensor 


is  invariant.   We  adopt  the  notation 

dS^HS^du^du,  ............  (15). 

M  v 

Then  dS2  is  a  differential  form  of  the  2nd  order. 


CHAPTER  XXI 

TENSORS  OF  THE  SECOND  ORDER 

IT  is  proposed  in  this  chapter  to  bring  together  some 
of  the  simpler  notations  and  theorems  relating  to  tensors 
of  the  second  order. 

19.  Symmetric  Tensors.  The  covariant  and  contra- 
variant  tensors  ||  S^  \\  and  ||  T*v  \\  are  respectively  called 
'  symmetric  '  if  in  every  measure-system 


and  ,,         ......  (16). 

If  a  tensor  is  symmetric  in  one  measure-system,  it  is 
symmetric  in  every  measure-system. 
For  in  measure-system  '  u  '  let 

S™  =  S%,     [/*,!,  =  1,2,  3,  4]. 
Then 


^ 

dv 


1(V) 


The  theorem  holds  for  contravariant  tensors  with  suit 
able  interchanges  of  the  covariant  and  contravariant 
types. 

We  notice  that  in  the  case  of  the  differential  form 
dS2  in  the  preceding  section  there  is  no  loss  of 
generality  in  considering  the  tensor  ||$MJ/||  to  be 
symmetrical. 


CHXXI]      TENSORS  OF  THE  SECOND  ORDER  161 

20.    Skew  Tensors.  The  covariant  and  contravariant 

tensors  ||  S^  \\  and  ||  T»v  ||  are  respectively  called  '  skew* 
if  in  every  measure-system 

8^  +  8^  =  0,  and  7^+7^  =  0  ......  (17). 

If  a  tensor  is  skew  in  one  measure-system,  it  is  skew  in 
every  measure-system. 

For  in  measure-system  'u1  let 

o(«)    .     O(M)        A 
&„  +  0,M  =  °« 

Then 


(M)  4-  .Sf(M)>l       a 

-+a__ 


An  analogous  proof  holds  for  ||  T*"^. 
It  is  evident  that  for  skew  tensors 

5^  =  0,     T^  =  0  ............  (17-1). 

21.  The  Determinants.  If  ||SJ|  and  ||^ 
respectively  covariant  and  contravariant  tensors  of  the 
second  order,  the  symbols  S(u}  and  T(u}  represent  the 
determinants  formed  by  the  components  as  elements, 

so  that 

(18), 


and  yM  =  det.   T£\ 

It  at  once  follows  from  the  law  of  the  multiplication  of 
determinants  that 


nd  T       T     .  p  («>..«..  P..  P« 

Tw=7>-'x|a  («,,«,  ,«„«, 

A  tensor  is  called  '  special'  if  its  determinant  vanishes. 
It  is  evident  from  the  above  equation  that  if  a  tensor 
w.  R.  u 


162  TENSORS  OF  THE  SECOND  ORDER  [CH 

be  special  in  one  coordinate-system,  it  is  special  in  every 
coordinate-system. 

Since  we  are  considering  a  four-dimensional  manifold, 
a  skew  tensor  is  not  necessarily  special.  But  in  a  three- 
dimensional  manifold  every  skew  tensor  would  be  special. 

If  ||  M^  ||  be  a  mixed  tensor,  the  symbol  M  will  denote 
the  determinant  formed  by  the  components  as  elements, 

so  that  M=det.   M;(x)\  ............  (19'2). 

It  is  unnecessary  to  denote  the  coordinate-system  *  x  ' 
in  the  symbol  for  the  determinant  since  the  value  of  the 
determinant  is  the  same  in  all  coordinate-systems,  that 
is  to  say,  the  determinant  is  an  invariant.  For  if  Mf  be 
the  value  in  system  *y'  and  M  in  system  e  x,' 


x 


d  (x19  x99  x3,  054)     9  (y1  ,  ?/2  ,  2/3,  y,) 
=  M  .......................................  (19-3). 

22.  Associate  Tensors.  Let  ||  S^  \\  and  ||  T1"  \\  be  a 
pair  of  tensors  of  the  second  order,  one  covariant  and 
the  other  contravariant,  such  that  in  the  coordinate- 
system  'U*  ^  T 


then  the  analogous  property  holds  for  every  coordinate- 
system. 

For 


ay       /3 


ay 


xxi]  TENSORS  OF  THE  SECOND  ORDER  163 

A  pair  of  tensors  with  this  property  are  called  'Associate 
Tensors.' 

If  either  of  the  two  tensors  be  not  special,  it  has  one 
and  only  one  associate  tensor  which  is  also  not  special. 

In  the  sequel,  unless  it  is  otherwise  expressly  stated, 
in  dealing  with  associate  tensors  we  shall  always  assume 
that  we  are  considering  non-special  tensors. 

Thus  the  associate  of  the  tensor  associated  with  a 
given  tensor  is  the  original  given  tensor.  The  associate 
of  any  tensor  ||  S^  \\  will  be  denoted  by  ||  >SM"  ||,  and 
conversely.  Also  with  the  above  notation, 

of  fi^  in  S(U]]--SM     (20'1), 


and  S<2  =  [cofactor  of  Sft  in  S(^+SM     (20'2), 

and  S(u)S(u]=l. 

Associate  tensors  enable  us  to  solve  tensor  equations 
of  the  form 

p;,Zr  =  jCr  ,[,,=  !,  2,  3,4]  ......  (21). 

For  operating  with  S  $JJ*  ,  we  find 

I  2  /;*:::'=  2  ssic, 

i-e-  '      X::  =  is^D^. 

Analogously  we  can  solve 

•ZStiX;:;f  =  D::;  [>=i,  2,  3,  4]...(2i-i). 

The  theory  of  associate  tensors  applies  also  to  mixed 
tensors.  For,  exactly  as  above,  if  ||  /S£  ||  and  ||  T*  \\  be  a 
pair  of  mixed  tensors  of  the  second  order,  such  that  in 
one  coordinate-system 

25;7;-  =  /;  ..................  (22), 

ft 

then  the  property  holds  for  every  coordinate-system. 
Also  all  the  analogous  theorems  hold. 

11  —  2 


164  TENSORS  OF  THE  SECOND  ORDER  [CH 

The  associate  of  a  non-special  mixed  tensor  ||  Sf  \\ 
will  be  written  ||  Sf\\. 

Thus  Iia*ll  =  imi  ...............  (22-1). 

Either  both  or  neither  of  a  pair  of  associate  tensors 
(invariant  or  covariant)  are  symmetrical,  and  either 
both  or  neither  are  skew. 

For  if  Hfiyi  be  symmetrical,  the  cofactor  of  S(^  in  S(u] 
is  equal  to  the  cofactor  of  S™  in  S(u\  and  analogously 
for  contravariance. 

Also  if  ||  S^  ||  be  skew,  the  cofactor  of  SJJ  in  S(u]  is 
equal  to  the  negative  of  the  cofactor  of  S(^  in  S(u\  and 
analogously  for  contravariance. 

23.  Derivative  Tensors.  By  means  of  a  pair  of 
tensors  of  the  second  order  we  can  derive  tensors  of 
various  types  which  are  called  tensors  derivative  from 
the  given  tensor. 

For  example,  let  ||  S^  \\  and  ||  S*v  \\  be  one  pair  of  as 
sociate  tensors  and  ||  T^v  ||  and  ||  T*v  ||  be  another  pair. 
Then  the  derivative  tensors 
2  S    2* 


f 


and  \\tS»T»\\ea>.d\\lSfltT" 

P  P 

are  derivative  tensors  of  mixed  type.  If  one  of  the 
tensors  ||$Ml/||  or  ||  J^J  be  symmetrical  these  four  tensors 
coalesce  into  two  tensors,  and  if  both  be  symmetrical 
they  coalesce  into  one  tensor. 

Similarly  ||  ^  T»  Tv*  Sp(r  \\    ............  (23'1) 


is  a  contra  variant  derivative  tensor.  There  are  four 
derivative  tensors  of  this  sort  which  coalesce  into  three 
if  ||  S^  ||  be  symmetrical,  and  into  one  if  ||  T^v  \\  be 
symmetrical. 


xxi]          TENSORS  OF  THE  SECOND  ORDER  165 

Again  \\ttT»TnS~\\     (23-2) 

P  * 

is  a  covariant  derivative  tensor,  with  other  analogous 
tensors  of  the  same  sort. 

Finally  there  are  analogous  sets  of  derivative  tensors 
in  which  ||  S^  \\  and  ||  T^v  \\  have  interchanged  roles. 


CHAPTER  XXII 

THE  GALILEAN  TENSORS 

24.     Galilean    Tensors.      We    have    already    [cf. 
Chapter  iv  of  Part  I]  defined  the  symbols 


, 


Define  the  Galilean  tensor  [i.e.  ||  6r{w)>||]  of  the  co 
ordinate-system  'u'  by 


Then  in  any  other  coordinate-system  'v,' 


(24.2). 


We  will  always  assume  that  in  any  coordinate-system 
fv'  the  coordinate-type  which  is  to  play  the  part  of 
the  exceptional  axis  for  the  Galilean  tensor  is  to  be 
assigned  the  subscript  4. 

With  this  convention,  the  condition  that  the  co 
ordinate-systems  'u'  and  (v*  have  the  same  Galilean 
tensor  is 

\ 

'] 


dVp  dv^ 


Operate  on     2  ^  with  2       * 

«          >  v 


OH  xxn]  THE  GALILEAN  TENSORS  167 

Then,  from  the  two  equations  above,  we  obtain 


i.e.  a*-^.  =  u*-aL       [u,  £=1,2,3,  4]...  (25-1). 

av,        a^ 

25.    Galilean  Differential  Forms.    The  differential 
form  arising  from  this  Galilean  tensor  is 


It  must  be  remembered  that  this  particular  Galilean 
differential  form  has  the  Galilean  property  for  the  group 
of  coordinate-systems,  such  as  %'  which  are  connected 
with  the  coordinate-system  (u'  by  sets  of  equations  of 
the  type  of  equations  (25'1)  above.  Call  such  a  group 
of  coordinate-systems  a  'Galilean  group.'  It  is  evident 
that  a  Galilean  group  is  defined  by  any  one  of  the 
coordinate-systems  which  belong  to  it,  since  each  such 
system  belongs  to  one  and  only  one  such  group. 

26.  The  Linear  Equations  of  Transformation. 
Let  a  track  in  the  manifold  be  defined  by  considering 
(ult  u2)  u3)  as  appropriate  functions  of  u±\  and  with  this 

(dui    du2    du\ 
supposition  let  (ult  u,,  u,)  stand  [or  ^,  ^,  ^J  . 

We  now  seek  the  condition  that 


/ 


along  a  track  between  any  given  pair  of  event-particles 
A  and  B  of  the  manifold,  may  have  a  stationary  value. 
This  is  given  by  the  adaptation  to  this  case  of  equations 


168  THE  GALILEAN  TENSORS         m  [OH 

(7)  of  Part  II  Chapter  v.  Since  the  coordinate-system 
tut  is  a  member  of  the  relevant  Galilean  group,  these 
equations  reduce  to 


/ 


c2 

i  ck  n.    xy    n,     I    7)  r..  i     o    o~l  ^9I7\ 

J-.c.  u/^  —  u/^  t^4  f  Up ,       |ju/  —  i ,  zjj  o j      ^  /  y, 

where  a^  and  6^  are  constants. 

If  the  coordinate-system  'v'  be  another  member  of 
the  same  Galilean  group,  the  same  track,  from  A  and  B 
and  stationary,  must  be  expressible  in  the  form 

0=1,2,3]  (27-1), 


where  cp  and  dp  are  constants. 

Hence  the  equations  of  transformation  relating  any 
pair  of  coordinate-systems  'u'  and  'v'  belonging  to  the 
same  Galilean  group  must  be  of  the  linear  form 

«M(iV-eM)  =  2k«awft  ............  (28), 

where  e^  and  l^  [//,,  a  =  1,  2,  3,  4]  are  constants. 

Furthermore,  from  equations  (2  5  )  above  [interchanging 
'u'  and  'v'  in  their  application], 

.........  <->• 


Also  we  can  conceive  equations  (28)  to  be  solved  in 
the  form 

«.K-/J-2^«^n  .........  (28-2). 

Hence  .9% 

^a7      ^  ^' 

^7? 

and  0)^—^  =  0)^1^. 

Thus  [cf.  equations  (25*1)] 

^        —  *• 


xxn]        •;         THE  GALILEAN  TENSORS  169 

27.  Cartesian    Group.     Thus    the    Cartesian   co 
ordinate-systems  of  Chapter  I  v  of  Part  I  are  a  particular 
Galilean  group  of  coordinate-systems  [such  as  the  system 
*#']  which  have  a  peculiar  spatio-temporal  significance 
in  the  four-dimensional  continuum  of  nature.    When 
we  are  discussing  the  Galilean  tensor  of  this  group,  we 
symbolise  it  by  ||  6?MI/||  in  place  of  the  longer  ||  0{&}p,||. 

We  will  call  this  Galilean  group  of  coordinate-systems 
the  '  Cartesian  group,'  and  the  corresponding  Galilean 
tensor  is  (in  case  of  doubt)  called  the  'Cartesian  Galilean 
tensor.'  Furthermore,  in  discussing  Galilean  tensors  we 
will  habitually  consider  in  illustration  the  Cartesian 
group  and  its  Galilean  tensor.  But  the  theorems  are 
quite  general  and  hold  for  any  Galilean  group. 

28.  Associate   Galilean    Tensors    and  Galilean 
Derivative  Tensors.    Let  the  coordinate-system  '  x ' 
belong  to  the  Cartesian  group.    Then  the  associate  of 
the  Galilean  tensor  is     6rM",  where 


I 


(29). 


[>=1,2,3,4] 

By  means  of  the  Galilean  tensor  and  its  associate  tensor 
derivative  tensors  are  found  from  any  given  pair  of 
associate  tensors,  ||£MJ  and  US1*"!!,  which  are  called  the 
6  Galilean  derivatives '  from  ||  S^  \\  or  ||  S"v  \\. 

Thus  the  Galilean  derivatives  of  mixed  type  are 

||  2  tf^  ||  and  \\ZG^\\ (30). 

The  components  in  the  coordinate-system  '  x '  of  the 
former  tensor  \ji  the  covariant  affix]  are 

0S!2.   b*,  v  =  i,  2, 3, 4], 


170  THE  GALILEAN  TENSORS  [CH 

i.e.  -  5J3,     0  =  1,  2,  3,  4 ;  v  =  1,  2,  3]] 

and  |SJ2,     0=1,2.3,4] 


(30-1). 


The  components  in  the  coordinate-system  *  x '  of  the 
latter  tensor  \JL  the  covariant  affix]  are 

&%Sy»     [>,"=1,2,  3,  4], 
Le-  -Sg;,     [>=1,2,3,4;  ft=l,2,3] 

and  c*S£,     [v=l,2,  3,  4] 

The  Galilean  derivative  of  contravariant  type  is 

/~Y  i/cr  O         1 1  /  Q  1  \ 

ur    Op,||    (^olj. 


[    (30-2). 


The  components  in  the  coordinate-system  '  x  '  of  this 
tensor  are 

GKG»S%>  o,"=i,2,3,4], 

i.e.  S2,     O."=1.2.3]     .........  (31-1) 

and  -\S%,     O=1>  2'3:  i-  =  4]... 

C 

and  -\S[:l,     O  =  4;  "=l,2,3] 

C 

and  1S«,     O  =  4;  «-  =  4] 

The  components  of  this  contravariant  Galilean  derivative 
are  linear  functions  of  the  components  of  ||  S^  ||. 
The  Galilean  derivative  of  covariant  type  is 

^5"  ||  ...............  (32). 


The  components  in  the  coordinate-system  lxj  of.  this 
tensor  are 

,    0^=1.2,3,4], 


xxn]  THE  GALILEAN  TENSORS  171 

i.e.  Sft,     |>,*  =  1,2,  3]  ............  (32-1) 

and  -c2S$,     [>  =  1,2,3;  i/=4]  ......  (32«2) 

and  -c'Sg,     [>  =  4  ;  i/=l,2,3]  ......  (32'3) 

and  c4S*>,     [>  =  4;  i/  =  4]     .........  (32'4). 

The  components  of  this  covariant  Galilean  derivative 
are  linear  functions  of  the  components  of  H^H. 
Finally  the  Galilean  invariants  are 

SSG^Sp,  and  SSG^S"  .........  (33). 

p  <r  p  <r 

Thus  in  any  coordinate-system  '  x  '  of  the  Cartesian 
group  there  are  the  two  group  invariants 


.........  (33-1) 

and  S»+S»+S»-c"S«  .........  (33«2). 

29.  Galilean  Derivative  Tensors  of  the  First  Order. 
Let  \\Fn\\  be  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  first  order,  then 
its  '  Galilean  derivative'  is  the  contravariant  tensor 

l|2(?-^||  ..................  (34). 

The  components  in  the  Cartesian  coordinate-system  'x 
of  this  tensor  are 

GSF?,  0  =  1,2,3,4]  ......  (34-i), 

i.e.  -F?,    O=l,2,3]  ............  (34-2) 


and  -,F(:\   0  =  4]  ..................  (34'3). 

0 

The  Galilean  invariant  is 

?SG'"FfFv  ...............  (34-4). 

P  <r 

Thus  in  any  coordinate-system  'x'  of  the  Cartesian 
group  there  is  the  group  invariant 

-  -(34-5). 


c 


172  THE  GALILEAN  TENSORS  [OH  xxn 

Again  let  ||  F*  ||  be  a  contra  variant  tensor  of  the 
first  order,  then  its  'Galilean  derivative'  is  the  co- 
variant  tensor 

IISG^II  (35). 

The  components  in  the  Cartesian   coordinate-system 
'#'  of  this  tensor  are 

<?£/%,[>  =1,2,  3,4] (35-1), 

i-e.  -/%,  [>=1,  2,3]   (35-2) 

and  c2^,,  [>  =  4]    (35-3). 

The  Galilean  invariant  is 

ttG^F'F* (36). 

p  a- 

Thus  in  any  coordinate-system  ex'  of  the  Cartesian 
group  there  is  the  group  invariant 

TO'  +  TO  +  TO'-c-TO   ...(36-1). 


CHAPTER  XXIII 

THE  DIFFERENTIATION  OF  TENSOR  COMPONENTS 

30.    The  Christoffel  Three-Index  Symbols.    Let 

||  H^v  ||  be  any  symmetric  covariant  tensor.    The  Chris- 
toffel  Three-Index  Symbol  of  the  first  kind  is  defined  by 


[X,  /t,v=l,2,  8,  4] 

The  Christoffel  Three-Index  Symbol  of  the  second 
kind  is  defined  by 

Hfav,  \}(*>  =  2H»H[jtr,  />]""  ......  (37-1). 

Then 

2  H    Hv  cr""  =  2S  H    H 


]w    .........  (37-2). 

It  is  evident  that 


T]    .........  (38), 

and  J7{fi*9  X}M»J7{pm  X}M    ......  (38-1). 

In  general  neither  H\_p,v,  X](u)  nor  H{^vy  \}(u]  is  a 
tensor,  though  we  shall  prove  that  they  are  group 
tensors  for  any  Galilean  group. 

31.    Differentiation  of  Determinants  of  Tensors. 

Let  the  covariant  tensor  ||  S^  \\  be  infinitesimally  in 
creased  to  ||  SpV  +  8S^V  ||,  and  in  consequence  let  S(u}  be 
come  8S(U\  Then 

(U)  =  SS  {cofactor  of  S$}  x  8^? 

...............  (39). 


mi  tfO  OWN?'*    eHF**—**?  /3Q'1\ 

Ihus       - —  =  owSSoJ5-r-£     (oy  ij. 

8^A  **  "  GUK 


174  DIFFERENTIATION  OF  [CH 

Analogously,  if  the  contravariant  tensor  ||  T^}  ||  be 
infinitesimally  increased  to  ||  T^  +  8T^}\\,  and  in  con 
sequence  T(u)  increases  to  T(U}  +  &T(U),  then 

STM=TM^^xBTs:}    .........  (40), 

d  T  3  T*v 

U          u 


Now  recur  to  the  symmetric  covariant  tensor 
Then 


p  a- 


_u 

9uf  " 


Now  the  interchange  of  the  symbols  p  and  cr  does 
not  affect  the  value  of 


Hence  [cf.  equation  (39*1)] 


32.  The  Standard  Formulae.  There  are  certain 
standard  formulae  which  are  the  foundation  of  the 
theory  of  the  differentiation  of  tensor  components. 

We  consider  the  symmetric  covariant  tensor  ||  -H^||. 

Now  H»-VHy>%&. 

3        >dua   d 
and  —  =  2--5  — . 


xxin]  TENSOR  COMPONENTS  175 

Then,  remembering  that  ||  II  ^  \\  is  symmetric, 


y  -\    d*U*  9M 
,,  "*"  9^9*;,,  9^  J  ' 


xfy  81;, 

Hence  interchanging  X,  p,  v  cyclically,  and  in  the 
former  of  the  two  summations  also  interchanging  a,  /3,  y 
cyclically,  but  in  the  latter  retaining  /3  and  y  in  their 
original  functions,  we  find 


/  <yi/  a         v  <. 

C     ^\2 
(«) 


and' 


0  y 

Hence  by  combining  these  three  equations 


This  formula  relates  the  three-index  symbols  of  the  first 
type,  as  expressed  in  different  coordinate-systems. 
Operate  on  this  formula  with 


We  consider  separately  the  effect  of  this  operation  on 
each  of  the  three  terms  of  the  above  formula, 


176  DIFFERENTIATION  OF  [CH 

And 

,  a]""  ^  ^  22  HJJ  ^  |L. 

J  (v) 


,3  y 

And 


'p  vv\ 


Thus,  transposing  terms,  the  formula  becomes 

^|i-  =  2^jy{^,pf)-22^{^r,€f)^^...(43). 
dv  ovv      p  cv  P  y  dv    dv 

This  is  the  standard  formula  for  - — ~  . 
Finally  operate  with 

and  transpose  terms.    We  obtain  (putting  a  for  e) 


(44). 

This  is  the  standard  formula  relating  the  three-index 
symbols  of  the  second  type,  as  expressed  in  different 
coordinate-  systems. 

Now  let  ||  K^v  ||  be  another  symmetric  covariant  tensor 
of  the  second  order.    Then  we  at  once  prove  that 

\\H{^,\r-K{^v,\r\\ (45) 

is  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  third  order,  for  which  X  is  the 
sole  contravariant  affix. 


xxm]  TENSOR  COMPONENTS  177 

For,  it  at  once  follows  from  the  formula  above  that 


(45-1). 


This  proves  the  theorem. 

33.    Covariant  Tensors  of  the  First  Order.    Let 

||  T^  ||  be  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  first  order,  and  let 
||  H^v  ||  be  any  symmetric  tensor  of  the  second  order. 
Then 


and 
Hence 


dv 


Now  use  formula  (43),  and  remember  that 


We  deduce 


ft  y 


Thus 


IN 


(46) 


is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  second  order. 

Interchanging  /x  and  v,  and  subtracting,  we  find  that 


dv,,         dv. 


,(47) 


is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  second  order. 


w.  R. 


12 


178  DIFFERENTIATION  OF  [CH 

When  ||  Tp  \\  is  a  given  co  variant  tensor  of  the  first 
order,  we  shall  use  T^v  to  mean 


dv 


Thus,  with  this  meaning,  ||  T(^v  ||  is  a  skew  co  variant 
tensor  of  the  second  order.    Also  identically 


34.   Contravariant  Tensors  of  the  First  Order.  Let 

||  S*  ||  be  any  contra  variant  tensor  of  the  first  order. 
Then 


,  3        .  duB   d 

and  —  =  2)  ^  ^— 

8^     P  8^8^ 

Thus 


Hence  [cf.  equation  (43)] 


/3  e 


Now  in  the  second  term  on  the  right-hand  side  inter 
change  a  and  e,  and  in  the  third  term  note  that 


and 


xxm]  TENSOR  COMPONENTS 

Hence,  rearranging  terms, 


179 


Thus 


..(48) 


is  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  second  order,  ft  being  the 
covariant  affix.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  differenti 
ation  adds  the  covariant  affix  to  the  original  tensor. 

Since  we  have  a  mixed  tensor  we  can  apply  the 
process  of  restriction,  identifying  a  and  ft.  Hence 
[cf.  equation  (41)  and  changing  e  to  a] 


is  invariant. 

35.    An  Example.    Let  A  be  any  scalar  function  of 

dA 


the  position  of  an  event-particle.    Then 


dua 


is  a  co 


variant  tensor.     Hence,  using  the  Galilean  tensor  for 
the  Cartesian  group  of  coordinate-systems, 


is  a  contravariant  tensor.    Hence  [cf.  formula  (48*1)  of 
section  34] 


is  invariant. 

In  any  Cartesian  coordinate- system 
reduces  to  /a*  4      &A      d*A\      1 


(49-1) 

this  invariant 
..(49-2). 


12—2 


180 


DIFFEKENTIATION  OF 


[CH 


Thus  we   have  transformed   this    fundamental    ex 
pression  to  any  coordinates. 


HI 

dv..\ 


Again  substituting  the   covariant  tensor 
T(VJ\\  in  formula  (46)  of  section  33,  we  deduce  that 

(50) 


for 


(topdv,      P  dvp 
is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  second  order. 


36.  Tensors  of  the  Second  Order.  Any  tensor  of 
the  second  order  can  be  expressed  as  a  sum  of  products 
of  pairs  of  tensors  of  the  first  order  [cf.  section  11]. 

Thus  if  ||  S^  ||  be  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  second 
order,  we  can  write 

H3J-P4AII. 

where  ||  A^  \\  and  ||  Bv  ||,  etc.,  are  covariant  tensors  of 
the  first  order. 
Thus 


f(«)        rdd(u)  aR(M)~i 

»v  =  s        M  B(u)  |  A(u)     v 
^          [_  du^  "    du^  J 

[lr\  A  M 
(^-f* 


Hence  [cf.  formula  (46)],  since  the  sums  of  products 
of  tensors  are  tensors, 

are 


du. 


-S 


...(51) 


is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  third  order,  since  it  is  equal 
to  such  a  tensor. 


xxm]  TENSOR  COMPONENTS  181 

Let  ||  T^  ||  be  a  contravariant  tensor  of  the  second 
order.    We  can  write 

||  2^11=  ||  2  ^5'  ||, 

where  ||  A"  \\  and  H^H,  etc.,  are  contravariant  tensors 
of  the  first  order. 
Thus 


Hence  [cf.  formula  (48)],  since  the  sums  of  products 
of  tensors  are  tensors, 

du^       p 

is  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  third  order,  X  being  the  sole 
covariant  affix. 

Identifying  X  and  v  and  summing,  we  obtain  by  this 
process  of  restriction  the  tensor 


(52-1), 

which  is  a  contravariant  tensor  of  the  first  order. 

Mixed  tensors  of  the  second  order  can  be  dealt  with 
by  exactly  the  same  method  as  that  applied  to  covariant 
and  contravariant  tensors  in  this  article,  and  by  the  use 
of  the  same  formulae  (46)  and  (48).  If  ||  L'^u)  \\  be  a 


182  DIFFEKENTIATION  OF  [CH 

mixed  tensor  of  the  second  order  we  deduce  the  tensor 


which  is  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  third  order  in  which  v 
is  the  sole  contra  variant  affix. 

Identifying  X  and  v  and  summing,  we  find  by  this 
process  of  restriction  the  tensor 


(M)_L  log  {_#<">}*     ...(531), 

which  is  a  contra  variant  tensor  of  the  first  order. 

37.  Tensors  of  the  Third  Order.  These  are  dealt 
with  by  the  same  method  as  those  of  the  second  order, 
by  the  use  of  the  formulae  obtained  in  sections  33,  34 
and  36.  The  only  such  tensor  which  we  need  explicitly 
consider  is  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  third  order  with  only 
one  contra  variant  affix.  Let  ||  K£v  \\  be  such  a  tensor. 
We  can  write  this  tensor  in  the  form 

II  je*  II -US  ^5*  II, 

where  ||  A^v  \\  is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  second  order 
and  ||  BK  ||  is  a  contra  variant  tensor  of  the  first  order, 
and  so  on  for  the  other  pairs  of  tensors. 

Hence  by  the  use  of  formulae  (51)  and  (48)  we  deduce 
that 


•>  />n]  | 


(54) 

is  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  fourth  order  in  which  X  is  the 
sole  contra  variant  affix. 


XXIII] 


TENSOR  COMPONENTS 


183 


Identifying  X  and  TT  and  summing,  we  obtain  by  tbis 
process  of  restriction  the  tensor 


H 


(55). 


which  is  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  second  order. 


CHAPTER  XXIV 

SOME  IMPORTANT  TENSORS 

38.  The  Riemann-Christoffel  Tensor.  Consider  the 
Tensor  Differentiation  of  the  co  variant  second-  order 
tensor 


which  is  obtained  as  formula  (46)  in  section  33.  We 
use  formula  (51)  of  section  36,  substituting  the  given 
tensor  for  ||  S^  ||.  We  deduce,  after  arranging  the  terms, 
the  covariant  tensor 


dut 


...(56). 

Now  interchange  X  and  v  in  this  tensor  and  subtract 
the  latter  from  the  former  tensor.    We  obtain  the  tensor 


Hence  by  section  17, 
£-H{pX,  Wy*-/-H{fv,  Tr}(u)  +  2H{w,  Trf  > 


...(57) 


CH  xxiv]         SOME  IMPORTANT  TENSORS  185 

is  a  mixed  tensor  of  the  fourth  order,  in  which  TT  is  the 
only  contravariant  affix.  This  is  the  Riemanri-Christoffel 
Tensor. 

Now  identify  v  and  TT  and  sum.  Then,  as  the  result 
of  this  process  of  restriction,  we  obtain  the  covariant 
second-order  tensor 


dup  duju,, 


P  « 


duff 

i 

>}(n}H{pp,  o-}(M)    (58). 

This  is  the  restricted  Riemann-Christoffel  Tensor.    It  is 
a  symmetric  covariant  second-order  tensor. 

39.  The  Linear  Gravitational  Tensor.  In  formula 
(45)  of  section  32,  we  have  proved  that,  if  ||  H^v  \\  and 
||  J^v  ||  are  any  symmetric  covariant  second-order  tensors, 

||«/{/AI>,  X}(w)  -  H{JJLV,  X}(w)  ||    (59) 

is  a  third-order  mixed  tensor  in  which  X  is  the  sole 
contravariant  index. 

Hence  operating  with 


we  find  that 

\\Jfrr,  ir]"'-2  J™SV,  X}w||     -..(59-1) 

A. 

is  a  covariant  third-order  tensor. 

Again  operating  on  this  latter  tensor  with 

^  T/p** 
*r-"w*> 

and  interchanging  the  indices,  viz.  putting  X  for  p,  p  for 
TT,  and  cr  for  X,  we  find  that 

rfU    (59-2) 


is  a  third-order  mixed  tensor  in  which  X  is  the  sole 
contravariant  index. 


186  SOME  IMPORTANT  TENSORS  [OH 

Now  we  replace  ||  H^v  \\  by  the  Galilean  tensor  ||  G^  ||, 
and  obtain  the  tensor 

lSQ%rb*,pf*-'S&G%J»G{pl,t  *r\\   (59-3). 

This  tensor  is  linear  in  the  components  of  ||«/^||.  In 
any  coordinate-system  '  x '  of  the  Cartesian  group,  this 
tensor  reduces  to 


'A 


(59'4). 


If  in  formula  (55)  of  section  37,  we  replace  ||  H^v  \\  by 
||  6rMV  ||  and  replace  ||  K£v  ||  by  the  above  tensor,  we 
obtain  the  tensor  utilised  in  the  law  (ii)  of  gravitation 
mentioned  in  Chapter  iv  of  Part  I.  In  the  coordinate- 
system  '  x '  this  law  of  gravitation  becomes 

?^a!/[>t'''Xr)  =  0'     [/*."=  1.2,  3,  4]  (60) 
where  there  is  no  attracting  matter. 

It  is  evident  that  ||  H^  ||  is  introduced  in  the  above 
reasoning  disconnectedly  on  two  distinct  occasions, 
namely  in  formula  (59),  and  in  the  operation  SJ?^*. 

There  is  no  logical  necessity  that  ||  H^  \\  should  be 
the  same  on  each  of  these  occasions,  still  less  that  it 
should  be  the  Galilean  tensor.  Accordingly  this  is  an 
opportunity  of  framing  other  laws  of  gravitation  in  which 
tensors  characteristic  of  other  fields  of  force  are  intro 
duced  instead  of  ||  G^v  \\  on  one  or  more  of  these  three 
occasions.  In  this  way,  the  influence  (if  any)  of  these 
fields  on  the  gravitational  field  may  be  represented. 

40.  Cyclic  Reduction.  The  Cyclic  Eeduction  of  the 
third-order  array  ||  A^v  ||  is  the  array 

\\A^V  +  A^K  +  AV^\\   (61). 

This  reduced  array  will  be  symbolised  by 

11 (61-1). 


xxiv]  SOME  IMPORTANT  TENSORS  187 

This  definition  and  the  symbolism  will  be  applied  to 
arrays  of  any  order.     Thus 

UCycL^JIHI^  +  ^JI   ......  (61-2), 

and 

||  Cycl.  A^  ||  =  ||  A^  +  A^+A^  +  An^v  \\  (6  1  '3). 
The  cyclic  reduction  of  a  covariant,  or  contravariant, 
tensor  of  any  order  is  a  tensor  of  the  same  order  and 
type  as  the  given  tensor.  The  permanence  of  the  order 
is  obvious;  we  have  only  to  prove  the  tensor  property. 
Consider  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  third  order.  Then 


\u.v 

*  ft 


Now  permute  (X,  /x,  v)  and  (a,  /3,  y)  each  cyclically. 
Then  T(V)  _         T(U]  dupdv^du, 

^"X~tf7    ^dv^dvydv,' 

and  analogously  for  T^.    Hence 


)  a        p 


This  proves  the  required  proposition,  and  an  analo 
gous  proof  evidently  holds  for  contra  variance,  and  for 
tensors  of  any  order. 

Now  replace  the  covariant  tensor  ||  T^v  \\  by 


- 


+ 


The  preceding  theorem  on  reduction,  applied  to  this 
case,  tells  us  that 


[r)S(v 
S 


(62) 

is  a  covariant  third-order  tensor. 


188 


SOME  IMPOKTANT  TENSORS 


[CH 


Hence  if  ||flL||  be  a  skew  tensor,  then 


+ 


. 

r 


ass; 


dv 


(62-1) 


is  a  covariant  third-order  tensor. 

41.  Some  Cartesian  Group  Tensors.  We  first  note 
that  if  ||  $M  ||  and  ||  T*  ||  be  Cartesian  group  tensors  (co 
variant  and  contravariant)  of  the  first  order,  then  [cf. 
section  29] 


and 


.(63) 


are  Cartesian  group  tensors  (contravariant  and  co 
variant)  of  the  first  order.  Furthermore  if  ||  S^v  \\  and 
||  T*v  ||  be  Cartesian  group  tensors  (covariant  and  con 
travariant)  of  the  second  order,  then  [cf.  section  28] 

"      and  I !«»,>,•  T*- 1 1 (63-1) 


sa 


are  Cartesian  group  tensors  (contravariant  and  covari 
ant)  of  the  second  order.     And  so  on  for  higher  orders. 
Also  in  the  case  of  the  two  Cartesian  tensors  (co 
variant  and  contravariant)  of  the  first  order 


0). 


and 


(63-2) 


are  Cartesian  invariants.    And  in  the  case  of  the  two 
Cartesian  tensors  of  the  second  order 


2  --^S^  and 


O), 


,(63'3) 


are  Cartesian  invariants. 

Let  (x19  x,,xSJ  x±)  and  (Pi,jp2,_p3,_p4)  be  the  coordinates 
of  any  two  event-particles  referred  to  the  same  co 
ordinate-system  c  x '  of  the  Cartesian  group.  Then 

||^—  pj|  and  ||  dx^  \\  and  ||c£pj!     ...(64) 
are  contravariant  Cartesian  tensors  of  the  first  order. 


xxiv]  SOME  IMPORTANT  TENSORS  189 

Thus 

2a>Ma(seM-pM)3  and  Zu^dx,*  and  Sov'd/y  (64'1) 
are  Cartesian  invariants.    Put 

r  =  JV(xf-PJ>  ...............  (65). 

Then  ^(xf-pf)1  =  i>-<f(xt-p^f  ...(65'1). 

Also  put 

*"-§;•     *'-!;•     ^=^2,  3,  4]  (65-2), 

«*"=*,'  +*,'+#,    vj=p;-+p;+p;  (05-3), 


=  -2 


^ 

-4), 
(65-5); 


then  from  above 

Qr£dxi  and  n^dp4  ...............  (66) 

are  Cartesian  invariants. 

Hence  differentiating  the  Cartesian  tensor  ||#M—  p^  \\ 
with  respect  to  #4,  we  deduce  that 

Hn^JI  and  IK^VU     .........  (67) 

are  Cartesian  tensors  (contra  variant  and  co  variant).  Also 
differentiating  the  Cartesian  invariant  r2  —  ca  (#4  —p$ 
with  respect  to  p4,  we  deduce  that 

nm{c(x4-Pl)-?m}     ............  (68) 

is  a  cartesian  invariant. 

Again  differentiating  the  Cartesian  tensor  ||  £1M  x^  || 
with  respect  to  #4,  we  deduce  that 


and 


(69) 


are  Cartesian  tensors  (contravariant  and  covariant). 


190  SOME  IMPORTANT  TENSORS          [OH  xxiv 

Again  differentiating  the  Cartesian  invariant 

^mMaV-^O-fm} 

with  respect  to  x±  we  find  that 

a^ji-is'^&J  (70) 

is  a  Cartesian  invariant. 

Also  differentiating  the  same  Cartesian  invariant  with 
respect  to  p\ ,  we  find  that 

i  <V  [c  (xt  -Pt)  -  £m]  S'&jj,  -  1V2'  (a;,  -  jv)  JV  (7 1 ) 

is  a  Cartesian  invariant. 

Also  from  either  of  the  tensors  of  formula  (69)  we 
find  that 

IV  [S'V  +  ^  IV  (1  +  ^2)  (f*,^)2]     (72) 
is  a  Cartesian  invariant. 


CAMBRIDGE:     PRINTED   BY  J.   B.   PEACE,    M.A.,    AT   THE    UNIVERSITY   PRESS 


QC     Whitehead,  Alfred  North 
6        The  principle  of 
W57     relativity 


P&AScL 


user  10:21761001209479 

t  itle:[he  principle  o1   reldtwi 
authonWhitehead,  Alfred  North, 

lteiii  id:31761012200 

i